Mercedes-Benz Approved Paint Repair Systems Index · S-01-GBL: A- and B-Class, flattable Surfacer,...

Mercedes-Benz Approved Paint Repair Systems

PPG – Daimler AG Paint Manuals Mercedes-Benz Cars and Vans [GBL] of 1

© PPG Industries Inc. [Master] 0000 / August 2012

Index Repair Systems

Explanation Overview

• Warranty Repair Systems • Economic Repair Systems • Special Repair Systems • Plastic Repair Systems • S.M.A.R.T. Repair Systems

Products

Overview Mercedes-Benz approved Products Overview PPG Technical Datasheets

General Information

Explanation of Pictograms Sanding and Cleaning

Detachable Body Components / Color Information

Paint Code Locations Repair of Plastic Parts

PPG Information

Color Tools Bodyshop Equipment Health and Safety Information

Contact

Hotline and Organization Distribution Network Update / Version Information


PPG – Daimler AG Paint Manuals Mercedes-Benz Cars and Vans [GBL] Page 1 of 2

© PPG Industries Inc. [Master] 0000 / July 2013

Index

Repair Systems

Explanation of Repair Systems Overview of Repair Systems • Warranty Repair Systems Passenger Cars

PW-01-GBL: flattable Surfacer PW-02-GBL: scratch-resistant Finish with flattable Surfacer PW-03-GBL: single-layer Topcoats with flattable Surfacer PW-04-GBL: flattable EP Primer-Surfacer PW-05-GBL: stonechipping Areas with flattable Surfacer PW-06-GBL: new e-coated Spare Parts with DP4000 Primer (scuffing mode)

• Economic Repair Systems Passenger Cars PE-01-GBL: wet-on-wet Surfacer PE-02-GBL: scratch-resistant Finish with wet-on-wet Surfacer PE-03-GBL: single-layer Topcoats with wet-on-wet Surfacer PE-04-GBL: wet-on-wet EP Primer-Surfacer PE-05-GBL: stonechipping Areas with wet-on-wet Surfacer PE-06-GBL: new e-coated Spare Parts with DP4000 Primer

• Warranty Repair Systems for special Applications S-01-GBL: A- and B-Class, flattable Surfacer, metal Substrates S-02-GBL: A-Class, flattable Surfacer, Plastic Substrates S-03-GBL: Maybach, flattable Surfacer S-04-GBL: Maybach, for stonechipping Areas, flattable Surfacer S-05-GBL: CeramiClear™, Sanding-, Fade-out and Polishing Process S-06-GBL: SLR McLaren, flattable Surfacer, Carbon Fiber Substrates S-07-GBL: MCC Smart, flattable Surfacer (Type 451) S-08-GBL: MCC Smart, for metal Framework (Type 451) S-09-GBL: Magno Designo Colors, Repair System for matt Finish S-10-GBL: for Vehicles with heat-sensitive Power Trains (max. 50°C) S-11-GBL: Repair of 3-stage Colors (“Bright” Colors) S-13-GBL: Repair Process for Designo-Titanium-Alubeam MB0 047 with Deltron GRS Basecoat S-14-GBL: Repair Process for Designo-Titanium-Alubeam MB0 047 with Envirobase HP Basecoat

• Warranty Repair Systems for Plastics PLW-01-GBL: for pre-primed Plastic Subtrates PLW-02-GBL: for flexible or semi-rigid Plastic Substrates PLW-03-GBL: for rigid Plastic Substrates

• Economic Repair Systems for Plastics PLE-01-GBL: for pre-primed Plastic Subtrates PLE-02-GBL: for flexible or semi-rigid Plastic Substrates PLE-03-GBL: for rigid Plastic Substrates PLE-04-GBL: for flexible or semi-rigid Plastic Substrates, no Surfacer

• S.M.A.R.T. Repair Systems Passenger Cars SRP-01-GBL: flattable EP Primer-Surfacer SRP-02-GBL: with flattable Surfacer

Products

Overview MB approved Products Overview Product Datasheets

General Information

Explanation of Pictograms Sanding and Cleaning




Color Information

Color Information Mercedes-Benz Passenger Cars Repair of Plastic Parts Mercedes-Benz Passenger Cars

Contact

Hotline and Organization Distribution Network


PPG – Daimler AG Paint Manuals Mercedes-Benz [EC] Page 1 of 2


Explanation of Repair Systems There are different systems for different situations:

- Why?

- What they are?

- What to use them on?

- How to use them?

Why

- Different substrates used in OEM

- Metals: bare Steel, galvanised Steel, Aluminium, Electrocoat

- Plastics: rigid, flexible

- Different surface areas

- small

- medium

- large

- Different OEM topcoats

- Direct Gloss: waterborne, solventborne MS / HS / UHS, 1K / 2K

- Basecoat: solventborne, waterborne, "Base-1 – Base-2"

- Clearcoats: scratch resistant, 1K, 2K, Powder, UV, solventborne, waterborne, matt

- Different VOC Regulations Worldwide

- USA: (National Rule, Rule 45, Rule 1151)

- Europe: (EC Directive 1999/13/EU, EC Directive 2004/42/EU)

- Global: (no VOC Regulation)

- Others: (Japan, China)

- Different Bodyshop Facilities

- Bodyshops focussed on passenger cars

- Bodyshops focussed on commercial vehicles


PPG – Daimler AG Paint Manuals Mercedes-Benz [EC] Page 2 of 2


What they are

- A guide to choose the best system

- Choice of products and processes for every need

- Select the most appropriate product for any substrate and size of work

- Easy to use following the guide

What to use them on

- Depending on the vehicle, use the appropriate system for a very productive and high quality job

- A system for every size, substrate or original finish

How to use them

- Follow the PPG Systems index guide

- Select the appropriate process before starting work

- Use the technical recommendations for products and equipment

- Please note that the products listed in the product setup (hardeners, thinners) in the repair systems are standard products to be used under standard conditions (18 – 25°C). Any other product combination (lower or higher temperature range, accelerated or for spot repair) can be found in the technical datasheet (links listed in the TDS field in each module).




Repair Systems for Mercedes-Benz Cars and Vans

Warranty Repair Systems Number Description

PW-01-GBL Warranty Paint Repair System with flattable Surfacer

PW-02-GBL Warranty Paint Repair System for scratch-resistant Finish with flattable Surfacer

PW-03-GBL Warranty Paint Repair System for single-layer Topcoats with flattable Surfacer

PW-04-GBL Warranty Paint Repair System with flattable EP Primer-Surfacer

PW-05-GBL Warranty Paint Repair System for stonechipping areas with flattable and tintable Surfacer

PW-06-GBL Warranty Paint Repair System for new e-coated spare parts with DP4000 primer (scuffing mode)

Economic Repair Systems Number Description

PE-01-GBL Economic Paint Repair System for older cars with WOW Surfacer

PE-02-GBL Economic Paint Repair System for older cars with scratch-resistant Finish, with WOW Surfacer

PE-03-GBL Economic Paint Repair System for older cars or vans with single-layer Topcoats, with WOW Surfacer

PE-04-GBL Economic Paint Repair System for older cars with WOW EP Primer-Surfacer

PE-05-GBL Economic Paint Repair System for older cars for stonechipping areas with WOW tintable Surfacer

PE-06-GBL Economic Paint Repair System for new e-coated spare parts with DP4000 primer

Special Repair Systems Number Description

S-01-GBL A- and B-Class: Warranty repair system, with flattable Surfacer, for rub-through areas on metal substrates

S-02-GBL A-Class: Plastic repair system, with flattable Surfacer

S-03-GBL Maybach: Warranty repair system, with flattable Surfacer

S-04-GBL Maybach: Warranty repair system for stonechipping areas with flattable and tintable Surfacer

S-05-GBL CeramiClear: Sanding-, Fade-out and Polishing Process

S-06-GBL SLR McLaren: Warranty repair system, with flattable Surfacer, for carbon fiber substrates, for spare parts and smaller damages

S-07-GBL MCC Smart: Plastic repair system, with flattable Surfacer

S-08-GBL MCC Smart: Repair system for metal framework (Tridion cell), with flattable or WOW Surfacer, including windshield and glassroof repair

S-09-GBL Magno Designo Colors: Warranty repair system and process for matt finish, with flattable Surfacer

S-10-GBL Warranty Paint Repair System for Vehicles with heat-sensitive Power Trains (hybrid drive, Liquid Petroleum Gas (LPG), fuel cell)

S-11-GBL Repair Process for 3-stage Colors (“Bright” Colors)

S-13-GBL Repair Process for Designo-Titanium-Alubeam MB0 047 with Deltron GRS Basecoat

S-14-GBL Repair Process for Designo-Titanium-Alubeam MB0 047 with Envirobase HP Basecoat




Repair Systems for Mercedes-Benz Cars and Vans

Warranty Plastic Repair Systems Number Description

PLW-01-GBL Repair system with flattable surfacer, for all pre-primed plastic subtrates or spare parts

PLW-02-GBL Repair system with flattable surfacer, for all flexible and semi-rigid plastic substrates

PLW-03-GBL Repair system with flattable surfacer, for rigid plastic substrates

Economic Plastic Repair Systems Number Description

PLE-01-GBL Repair system with flattable or WOW surfacer, for all pre-primed plastic subtrates or spare parts

PLE-02-GBL Repair system with flattable or WOW surfacer, for all flexible and semi-rigid plastic substrates

PLE-03-GBL Repair system with flattable or WOW surfacer, for rigid plastic substrates

PLE-04-GBL Repair system for flexible and semi-rigid plastic substrates, bare or primer sand-through areas, no deeper scratches or damages, not repaired

S.M.A.R.T. Repair Systems Number Description

SRP-01-GBL S.M.A.R.T. repair system for passenger cars and vans, with EP Primer-Surfacer

SRP-02-GBL S.M.A.R.T. repair system for passenger cars and vans, with flattable Surfacer




Warranty Paint Repair System PW-01-GBL

Warranty Paint Repair System with flattable Surfacer

Substrates

Bare Steel Galvanized Steel Aluminium E-coat (Spare Parts) OE Finish

Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Primer Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Deltron D831

Surfacer Deltron Greymatic NS / MS

Deltron Greymatic NS / MS



Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)

Envirobase High Performance





Clearcoat(s) Deltron D800 Deltron D894

Deltron D8120

Deltron D800 Deltron D894

Deltron D8120


Deltron D8120


Deltron D8120


Deltron D8120

Deltron D837 – DX330 Spirit Wipe

See “Sanding and Cleaning”

Use D845 if heavily soiled Ready for use

Apply with clean lint free

cloth

Wipe off with clean lint free

cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77


Apply D8012 (RLD239V) over bare

metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)

Suitable knife or spreader

30 – 40 (20°C)

IR med.: 5-6 IR shrt.: 4-5

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!

30 min. (20°C) with PPG 2K

Primers RLD185

Deltron D831 – Universel

1:1

with D832 / D833

(0,2 D866 if necessary)

8 hours 16” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats

(15 – 20 µm) 5 min. bet-ween coats

30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V

Deltron Greymatic NS

3:1:0,5 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)

10 min. bet-ween coats,

10 min. before baking

25 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD177

or




Deltron Greymatic MS

4:1:1 with D841 and D807

75 min. 20 – 30” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (80 – 140 µm)



30 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD193

Deltron GRS BC

Use tack rag. Check color to adjacent parts

10 % D841 for optimum

performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm

2 coats + control coat

(if necessary)

10 min. bet-ween coats, 15 min. be-

fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or



Addition of thinner acc.

TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm

2 – 3 coats + control coat

(if necessary)

Dry till evenly matt / use ExpressDry

RLD213 RLD229V

Deltron D800 – MS Clearcoat

Use only over GRS BC!

Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,

1 full coat (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)

(min. 1 hr. after drying)

RLD160

or

Deltron D894 – HS Clear

Use tack rag 4:1:0,5 with

D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 1 mist coat, 1 full coat

(50 – 60 µm)

No flash-off between coats or

before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)

(1-24 hrs. after drying)

RLD100

or

Deltron D8120 – HS Premium Clear


D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181





Warranty Paint Repair System for scratch-resistant Finish with flattable Surfacer

Substrates






















cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V


3:1:0,5 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)



25 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD177

or





4:1:1 with D841 and D807

75 min. 20 – 30” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (80 – 140 µm)



30 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD193

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V

Deltron D8105 – CeramiClear

Use tack rag 2:1 with D8215

1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or



D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)

10 min. bet-ween coats, 5 – 10 min.

before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195




Notes: • To identify a car with a scratch resistant finish like CeramiClearTM, please refer to the Mercedes-Benz Service Information SI98.00-P-0013A

and to the section "Mercedes-Benz Color Information".

• A "C" before the color code indicates that this car has been sprayed with a scratch resistant clearcoat like PPG's CeramiClearTM.

• From January 1st 2010 all new model series will no longer have the “C” before the color code. All new models except A, B and vans will then use a scratch resistant clearcoat (nano technology or reflow).

• In the case that both metal and plastic body parts on one car need to be repaired, it is recommended due to efficiency reasons to repaint the plastic parts also with CeramiClearTM.

• If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the scratch resistant OE clearcoat thoroughly. Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems.

• Panel repair - also of adjacent parts – is recommended for optimum scratch resistance!

• PPG CeramiClearTM as a scratch resistant clearcoat requires a special process for removing dust and polishing. Please refer to the "Special Repair System S-05" to find a detailed description.

• CeramiClearTM is a registered Trademark of PPG Industries Inc.





Warranty Paint Repair System for single-layer Topcoats with flattable Surfacer

Substrates







Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG





cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V


3:1:0,5 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)



25 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD177

or





4:1:1 with D841 and D807

75 min. 20 – 30” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (80 – 140 µm)



30 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD193

Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807

max. 6 hours 17 – 18” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01





Warranty Paint Repair System with flattable EP Primer-Surfacer

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Surfacer Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012

EP-Primer with Surfacer

Deltron Deltron Greymatic

NS / MS


NS / MS


NS / MS


NS / MS

Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)






Clearcoat(s)


Deltron D8105 Deltron D8120 Deltron D8122













cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185

Deltron D8012 – WB-EP Surfacer (sandable)

8:1:1 with D8212 / T494 (T495)

1,5 hours 60 – 65” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (100 – 150

µm)

5-10 min. bet-ween coats,

5-10 min. before baking

30 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD239V

or

Deltron D8012 – WB-EP Primer

8:1:2-3 with D8212 / T494 (T495)

1,5 – 2 hours 30 – 35” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1 – 2 coats (15 – 20 µm)

10 – 15 min. between

coats

Dustfree: 20 min. (20°C) Through-dry: 25 min. (60°C)

P360 – P500 Edges: P1200 RLD239V

followed by





3:1:0,5 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)



25 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD177

or


4:1:1 with D841 and D807

75 min. 20 – 30” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (80 – 140 µm)



30 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD193

Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or






D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181

or



D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195





Warranty Paint Repair System for stonechipping areas with flattable and tintable Surfacer

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Primer Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Surfacer Deltron D821 Deltron D821 Deltron D821 Deltron D821 Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)






Clearcoat(s)















cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V

Deltron D821 – HS Antichip Primer (WOW)

Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between

coats

30 – 45 min. (20°C)

P400 – P500 after baking 20 – 30 min.

(60°C)

RLD104




Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or






D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181

or



D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195





Warranty Paint Repair System for new e-coated spare parts with DP4000 primer (scuffing mode)

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837

Primer Deltron D831 (rub-through)

Primer-Surfacer Deltron D8012 (rub-through)

Surfacer Deltron DP4000 Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s) Envirobase High

Performance

Clearcoat(s)



Note: faultless e-coat requires only cleaning or in some few cases light scuffing. Extensive sanding through the e-coat has to be avoided to maintain the excellent corrosion protection of the e-coat. Rub-through areas in the e-coat (from removed dirt inclusion or fault locations) need to be primed with D8012 or D831 prior to the application of DP4000. Deltron D837 – DX330 Spirit Wipe




cloth


cloth RLD63

Deltron DP4000 – 2K Primer (Scuffing Mode)

2:1:0,5

with D8238 and

D807/66, D8718

(Use slowest hardener /

thinner option for Gas-IR)

Use D8012 (RLD239V) or

D831 (RLD10V) for rub-through

areas

1 hour 16 – 18” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,2 – 1,3 mm 1 – 2 coats (25 – 35 µm)

over night (20°C)

Bake (60°C): 30 min.

Light scuffing with fine pad RLD249V

IR short / med.: 5 min. flash-off,

10 min. cure 1x Envirobase

ExpressDry Cycle (6-8 min.)

Gas-IR: 50 cm, 110°C

Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01




Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or

Deltron D893 – Low VOC Performance Clear


D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or






D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181

or



D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195




Economic Paint Repair System PE-01-GBL

Economic Paint Repair System for older cars with WOW Surfacer

Substrates



Surfacer Deltron Greymatic NS / MS (WOW)

Deltron Greymatic NS / MS (WOW)










Deltron D8120


Deltron D8120


Deltron D8120


Deltron D8120


Deltron D8120





cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V

Deltron Greymatic NS (WOW)

3:1:1 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)

10 min. bet-ween coats

20 – 30 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD177

or




Deltron Greymatic MS (WOW)

4:1:2 with D841 and D807

75 min. 14 – 16” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 1 – 2 coats (40 – 80 µm)


20 – 30 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD193

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181





Economic Paint Repair System for older cars with scratch-resistant Finish, with WOW Surfacer

Substrates






















cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V


3:1:1 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)


20 – 30 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD177

or





4:1:2 with D841 and D807

75 min. 14 – 16” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 1 – 2 coats (40 – 80 µm)


20 – 30 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD193

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or



D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195

Notes: • To identify a car with a scratch resistant finish like CeramiClearTM, please refer to the Mercedes-Benz Service Information SI98.00-P-0013A

and to the section "Mercedes-Benz Color Information". • A "C" before the color code indicates that this car has been sprayed with a scratch resistant clearcoat like PPG's CeramiClearTM. • In the case that both metal and plastic body parts on one car need to be repaired, it is recommended due to efficiency reasons to repaint

the plastic parts also with CeramiClearTM. • If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the scratch resistant OE clearcoat thoroughly.

Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems. • Panel repair - also of adjacent parts – is recommended for optimum scratch resistance!


• CeramiClearTM is a registered Trademark of PPG Industries Inc.





Economic Paint Repair System for older cars or vans with single-layer Topcoats, with WOW Surfacer

Substrates







Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG





cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V


3:1:1 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)


20 – 30 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD177

or





4:1:2 with D841 and D807

75 min. 14 – 16” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 1 – 2 coats (40 – 80 µm)


20 – 30 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD193

Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01





Economic Paint Repair System for older cars with WOW EP Primer-Surfacer

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77

Primer-Surfacer Deltron D8012 (WOW)

Deltron D8012 (WOW)

Deltron D8012 (WOW)

Deltron D8012 (WOW)

Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)






Clearcoat(s)















cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185

Deltron D8012 – WB-EP Primer

8:1:3 with D8212 / T494 (T495)

1,5 – 2 hours 20 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 mm 1 – 2 coats (15 – 30 µm)



Overcoat when matt

with 2K Primers or topcoats

RLD239V

Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01




Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181

or






D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195





Economic Paint Repair System for older cars for stonechipping areas with WOW tintable Surfacer

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Primer Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Surfacer Deltron D821 (WOW) Deltron D821 (WOW) Deltron D821 (WOW) Deltron D821 (WOW) Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC

Clearcoat(s)















cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between

coats

30 – 45 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD104




Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181

or






D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195





Economic Paint Repair System for new e-coated spare parts with DP4000 primer

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837

Primer Deltron D831 (rub-through)

Primer-Surfacer Deltron D8012 (rub-through)

Surfacer Deltron DP4000 Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s) Envirobase High

Performance

Clearcoat(s)







cloth


cloth RLD63

Deltron DP4000 – 2K Primer

2:1:0,5

with D8238/9 and

D807/12/66, D8718/9


D831 (RLD10V) for rub-throughs

1 hour 16 – 18” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,2 – 1,3 mm 1 – 2 coats (25 – 35 µm)

15 min. before

topcoat

15 min. (20°C) up to 5 days

without sanding

P400 – P500 after baking

30 min. (60°C) RLD249V

Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153




or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181

or






D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195




Special Paint Repair System S-01-GBL

A- and B-Class: Warranty repair system with flattable Surfacer, for rub-through areas on metal substrates

The Mercedes-Benz "A" series cars (types 168, 169) and “B” series cars (type 245) are finished with a slurry type powder coating (generation I and generation II) that can cause problems when sanded through and recoated. The featheredge of this clearcoat can be extremely solvent sensitive. The following process will avoid any such problems when repairing this paint system.

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D8401 Deltron D8401

no special procedure required, use

standard warranty or economic repair

system

Deltron D8401 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Primer-Surfacer Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)


Envirobase High Performance Envirobase High

Performance Clearcoat(s) Deltron D894 Deltron D894 Deltron D894

Deltron D8401 – Waterborne Cleaner


Do not use any other

solvent Ready for use


cloth


cloth RLD63

• Sand out the defects and featheredge the clear very carefully using P400 to P600 dry (or P800 to P1200 wet) grade sanding paper. • Clean with D8401 waterborne cleaner, and dry. DO NOT use a solventborne degreaser, as this can cause swelling of the OE waterborne

basecoat featheredge. • Infrared the repair area for 3 minutes, and cool. • Reclean using D8401. • If the damage is through down to the substrate use waterborne EP primer Deltron D8012 (followed by Galvaplast 77 in the case of dents). • Be careful only to cover the substrate; any covering of the featheredge should be sanded carefully using P400 to P600 dry (or P800 to

P1200 wet) grade sanding paper before the application of D8012. Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185

Deltron D8012 – WB-EP Primer-Surfacer

8:1:2 with D8212 / T494 (T495)

1,5 – 2 hours 25 – 35” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 2 – 3 coats (50 µm)


coats


P360 – P500 Edges: P1200 RLD239V




Notes: • Apply 2 light coats, reducing the pressure of the spraygun if required, using D8012 as a primer-surfacer. • D8012 can be used as a primer with 1 coat when overcoated with a 2K surfacer (Deltron Greymatic). • Ensure that the D8012 covers the complete repair area. • After flash-off, dry using Infrared. • The repair area can then be sanded and repaired as normal using one of the approved topcoat systems below. Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

Fade-out Process for Powderslurry Clearcoat (Generation II) • Abrade the area for the fade out using a 3M™ Soft Pad ultrafine and Deltron D8407 WB Flatting Paste • Apply the clearcoat 1 visit • Fade out clearcoat edge using a 4 : 1 mix of clearcoat (RFU) and Thinner • After drying smooth edge using P2000 paper wet • Polish with 3M™ Perfect-it™ III "Fast Cut Compound" on a sponge Mop. Polish at all times from the repair clearcoat onto the OE substrate • Polish with 3M™ Perfect-it™ III "Fine Compound" on a sponge mop • Finish with 3M™ Perfect-it™ III "Machine Polish" on a waffle head mop Notes: • Powderslurry clearcoat (generation I as well as generation II) is only used on vehicles types 168, 169 and 245 out of Rastatt plant

production. Vehicles type 168 out of Brasil plant production are painted with a conventional paint system. • PPG SPP polishing system can be used alternatively. • PPG will offer an introduction into this special repair system in his training courses. In urgent cases please contact your PPG distributor,

demonstrator or your local PPG organization for assistance.





A-Class: Plastic repair system, with flattable Surfacer Some plastic parts on the Mercedes-Benz "A" series cars (type 168: front fenders and rear door) are finished with a slurry type powder coating (generation I and generation II) that can cause problems when sanded through and recoated. The featheredge of this clearcoat can be extremely solvent sensitive. The following process will avoid any such problems when repairing this paint system.

Substrates

Bare Plastic (PA/PPE)

Repaired Plastic (PA/PPE)1)

Preprimed (Spare Parts) OE Finish


no special procedure required, use standard warranty, economic or plastic repair system

Deltron D8401 Stopper / Filler Iviplast 66 Iviplast 66 Primer Deltron D820, D8420 Deltron D820, D8420 Deltron D820, D8420 Primer-Surfacer Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)




Clearcoat(s) Deltron D894 Deltron D894 Deltron D894 1) Please refer to the chapter "Repair of Plastic Parts" to find more details about the repairing of plastic parts with the approved MB Plastic Repair Kit.



Do not use any other

solvent Ready for use


cloth


cloth RLD63

• Sand out the defects and featheredge the clear very carefully using P400 to P600 dry (or P800 to P1200 wet) grade sanding paper. • Clean with D8401 waterborne cleaner, and dry. DO NOT use a solventborne degreaser, as this can cause swelling of the OE waterborne

basecoat featheredge. • Infrared the repair area for 3 minutes, and cool. • Reclean using D8401. • If the damage is through down to the substrate use the plastic adhesion promoter Deltron D820 or D8420 (in the case of deeper damages

use also Iviplast 66 before). • Be careful only to cover the substrate; any covering of the featheredge should be sanded carefully using P400 to P600 dry (or P800 to

P1200 wet) grade sanding paper before the application of D8012. Iviplast 66


SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)

Do not use IR!

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Plastic Primers

RLD185

Deltron D820 / D8420 – Plastic Primer

D820: ready-for-use

D8420: aerosol can,

ready-for-use

D820: 1,3 – 1,6 mm

1 – 2 coats (3 – 7 µm)

D820: 30 min. (20°C)

D8420: 20 min. (20°C)

PPG Topcoats or 2K Primers

(flex if appropriate)

RLD165V





8:1:2 with D8212 / T494 (T495)

1,5 – 2 hours 25 – 35” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 2 – 3 coats (50 µm)


coats


P360 – P500 Edges: P1200 RLD239V

Notes: • Apply 2 light coats, reducing the pressure of the spraygun if required, using D8012 as a primer-surfacer. • D8012 can be used as a primer with 1 coat when overcoated with a 2K surfacer (Deltron Greymatic). • Ensure that the D8012 covers the complete repair area. • After flash-off, dry using Infrared. • The repair area can then be sanded and repaired as normal using one of the approved topcoat systems below. Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

Fade-out Process for Powderslurry Clearcoat (Generation II) • Abrade the area for the fade out using a 3M™ Soft Pad ultrafine and Deltron D8407 WB Flatting Paste • Apply the clearcoat 1 visit • Fade out clearcoat edge using a 4 : 1 mix of clearcoat (RFU) and Thinner • After drying smooth edge using P2000 paper wet • Polish with 3M™ Perfect-it™ III "Fast Cut Compound" on a sponge Mop. Polish at all times from the repair clearcoat onto the OE substrate • Polish with 3M™ Perfect-it™ III "Fine Compound" on a sponge mop • Finish with 3M™ Perfect-it™ III "Machine Polish" on a waffle head mop Notes: • Powderslurry clearcoat (generation I as well as generation II) is only used on vehicles types 168, 169 and 245 out of Rastatt plant

production. Vehicles type 168 out of Brasil plant production are painted with a conventional paint system. • PPG SPP polishing system can be used alternatively. • PPG will offer an introduction into this special repair system in his training courses. In urgent cases please contact your PPG distributor,

demonstrator or your local PPG organization for assistance.





Maybach: Warranty repair system with flattable Surfacer The Maybach (type 240) requires a special repair process using a double clearcoat application. To achieve an optimum gloss, appearance and scratch resistance, CeramiClear™ is used for the final clearcoat layer.

Substrates













1. Clearcoat(s) Deltron D894 Deltron D8120














cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V


3:1:0,5 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)



25 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD177

or





4:1:1 with D841 and D807

75 min. 20 – 30” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (80 – 140 µm)



30 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD193

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V

First Clearcoat:



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181

Intermediate Sanding

After drying the complete surface of the

clearcoat is flatted

See “Sanding and Cleaning” P800 – P1200 P1000 –

P1500


cloth


cloth RLD63

Second Clearcoat:






1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or



D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195

Notes: • In the case that both metal and plastic body parts on one car need to be repaired, it is recommended due to efficiency reasons to repaint

the plastic parts also with CeramiClearTM.




• CeramiClear™ is a registered Trademark of PPG Industries Inc.





Maybach: Warranty repair system for stonechipping areas with flattable and tintable Surfacer The Maybach (type 240) requires a special repair process using a double clearcoat application. To achieve an optimum gloss, appearance and scratch resistance, CeramiClear™ is used for the final clearcoat layer.

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Primer Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Surfacer Deltron D821 Deltron D821 Deltron D821 Deltron D821 Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)




















cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V

Deltron D821 – HS Antichip Primer

Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between

coats, 15 min. before baking

20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104




Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V

First Clearcoat:



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181

Intermediate Sanding

After drying the complete surface of the

clearcoat is flatted

See “Sanding and Cleaning” P800 – P1200 P1000 –

P1500


cloth


cloth RLD63

Second Clearcoat:






1 hour 16 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (45 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C) 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD170V

or



D897 and D807

1 hour 19 – 21” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD195

Notes: • In the case that both metal and plastic body parts on one car need to be repaired, it is recommended due to efficiency reasons to repaint

the plastic parts also with CeramiClearTM.




• CeramiClear™ is a registered Trademark of PPG Industries Inc.





CeramiClear: Sanding-, Fade-out and Polishing Process

PPG CeramiClear™ Deltron D8105 and D8122 are scratch resistant clearcoats and require a special process for sanding of the OE finish, for removing dirt particles and for polishing (fade-out process). Due to the hard surface it is absolutely necessary to be very careful when repairing a vehicle with an OE CeramiClear™ finish.

Deltron D8105 and D8122 can be polished after drying for 30 minutes at 60°C and cooling down.

PPG recommends to polish D8105 within 1 to 2 hours up to 5 days after painting. Polishing after a longer time period leads to a strong increase of work and time. CeramiClear™ – Repair Process (Pretreatment of OE Finish)

Clean the OE finish thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt. Clean the surface with D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe or D845 (DX310) High Strength Degreaser. If PPG Envirobase is going to be used, clean with D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner.

Dry sanding: start with 3M™ Hook-it™ 255P Gold grade P500 with an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3 mm). Depending on the hardness of the OE finish paper grade P320 – P400 together with an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 5mm) can be used (alternative abrasives: 3M™ Hook-it™ Purple Premium).

Clean the surface again with D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe or D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner.

CeramiClear™ – Blending of Basecoat, Clearcoat Application complete Part


Sand the surface with an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3 – 5 mm) and with 3M™ Hook-it™ 260L grade P800 – P1200; sand edges and borders again with 3M™ Soft Pad ultrafine


CeramiClear™ – Fade-out Procedure


Blending Area Basecoat Blending Area Clearcoat (Fade-out Area)

Sand the surface with an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3 – 5 mm) and with 3M™ Hook-it™ 260L grade P800 – P1200; sand edges and borders again with 3M™ Soft Pad ultrafine

Moist sanding of the blending area with an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3 mm) and 3M™ Trizact™ Finesse-it™ fine sanding disc P3000 supported by a preparation gel, e.g. 3M™ Matt Gel or 3M™ Prep & Blend

Moist sanding of the fade-out area with 3M™ Trizact™ Finesse-it™ fine sanding disc P3000 and an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3 mm). The surface must be 100 % matt. Do not use Scotchbrite! The fade-out area must be sanded sufficiently large.





CeramiClear™ – Fade-out Procedure (cont.)

Deltron D8105: for detailed information see technical datasheet "RLD170V"

Deltron D8122: for detailed information see technical datasheet "RLD195"

Apply CeramiClear™ D8105 / D8122 as usual and fade out into the matted blending area. Do not apply the clearcoat on the unsanded surface!

Only D8105: Mix the ready-for-use CeramiClear™ approx. 1 : 3 with CeramiClear™ Fade-out Thinner D8425.

Only D8105: Apply the thinned CeramiClear™ in light coats over the fade-out area (always stay in the matted area!). Apply enough to give a smooth edge.

Fade-out D8122 with Deltron Aerosol Fade-out Thinner D8730 or D8429 (RLD199V).

Flash-off time before forced drying at 20°C: 10 minutes

Forced drying at 60°C for 30 – 35 minutes (metal temperature)

After forced drying cure the fade-out area for another approx. 15 minutes with IR (medium) at 100 % power. Afterwards let the area cool down for 20 – 30 minutes before polishing.

If necessary, sand out any dirt in the fade-out area with 3M™ Trizact™ Finesse-it™ film disc or remove any texture with a 75-mm 3M™ Trizact™ Finesse-it™ fine sanding disc P3000 (wet) and an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3 mm). Do not use any other abrasives (P2000 wet or coarser)

Polishing the fade-out area with PPG Speciality Performance Products SPP1001: • always start the polishing process with the black SPP final polishing pad (SPN1903) • use only a small amount of the polishing compound • max. 1.500 rpm • always lead the buffing machine from the repair clearcoat to the OE finish • always check the surface temperature • always check the surface during polishing (finalize with 3M™ Finish control spray) Notes: • for a more aggressive polishing use the orange SPP compounding foam pad (SPN1902) • use SPP lambswool compounding pad (SPN1905) only in difficult situations for polishing

Polishing System SPP1001: for detailed information see technical datasheet "T001"

CeramiClear™ – Removing of Dust and Dirt

3M™ Trizact™ Finesse-it™ film discs are recommended to sand out dust or dirt

Remove any sanding scratches with a 75-mm 3M™ Trizact™ Finesse-it™ fine sanding disc P3000 (wet) and an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3 mm)

Polish the repaired area with PPG Speciality Performance Products SPP1001 and the orange SPP compounding foam pad (SPN1902) on an adjustable buffing machine (approx. 1.500 rpm)

To achieve a mirror gloss finish the repaired area with the black SPP final polishing pad (SPN1903)

Using the recommended procedure the original texture and scratch resistance will remain at the highest possible level.

Additional repair recommendations with other manufacturers of abrasives and polishing compounds (e.g. 3M, Farécla, Festool, Meguiar's, Mercedes-Benz original, Mirka, Sonax NanoPolish) are available on request.





SLR McLaren: Warranty repair system with flattable Surfacer, for carbon fiber substrates, for spare parts and smaller damages

There are originally equipped carbon fibre reinforced composites used on the Mercedes-Benz SLR McLaren (type 199). In the case of sanding through the OEM finish and subsequent recoating this can cause problems (bullseyes, featheredge or sandscratches around repaired area). The following process will avoid any such problems when repairing this paint system.

Substrates

Carbon fibre (Spare Part)

Spare Part with minor Defects1)

OE Finish with rub-through Areas1)




Stopper / Filler MB Plastic Repair Kit2) or IviPlast 66

MB Plastic Repair Kit2) or IviPlast 66 (if required)

Surfacer Deltron D821 tinted Deltron D821 tinted Deltron D821 tinted Intermediate sanding P400 (dry) or P800 (wet) Surfacer Deltron D821 tinted Deltron D821 tinted Deltron D821 tinted Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s) Envirobase High Performance Envirobase High Performance Envirobase High Performance




1) Please note that only scratches and abrasions in the substrates are allowed to be repaired, but no cracks or holes that show damages of the carbonfibres. 2) Please refer to the chapter "Repair of Plastic Parts" to find more details about the repairing of plastic parts with the approved MB Plastic Repair Kit.

Cleaning: The key to successful painting of plastic substrates is thorough preparation. Inadequate cleaning is especially likely to cause adhesion failure when a plastic substrate is involved. • Wash all surfaces with soap and water • If the surface of the plastic substrate appears inconsistant, it is recommended that the part be ‘flamed’ or pre-stoved for 30 minutes at

60°C. This will drive any residual release agents to the surface for easier removal during the cleaning process. • Clean the plastic surface carefully and thoroughly with D846 DX103 Degreasing Agent for Plastics. Clean each section individually wiping

on D846 with a clean cloth and removing it another clean dry cloth. For textured or other uneven surfaces, the use of a fine nylon brush (such as a nailbrush) is recommended.

Deltron D846 – DX103 Cleaner / Antistatic Agent for Plastics

See “Sanding and Cleaning” Ready for use


cloth


cloth

Antistatic agent: apply

to part

Antistatic agent: leave to evaporate

RLD241V

Deltron D8434 – Plastic Substrate Cleaner


1:1 or 1:2 with water

Scuff with Scotch-Brite™ Grey Ultrafine

Rinse with clean water, allow to dry

RLD241V

• Sand out the defects and featheredge the clear very carefully using P400 to P600 dry grade sanding paper. • Clean with D8434 Plastic Substrate Cleaner, and dry. DO NOT use a solventborne degreaser, as this can cause swelling of the OE

waterborne basecoat featheredge. • Infrared the repair area for 3 minutes, and cool. • Reclean using D8434. • If the damage is through down to the substrate use the MB Plastic Repair Kit or Iviplast 66.




• Be careful only to cover the substrate; any covering of the featheredge should be sanded carefully using P400 to P600 dry grade sanding paper before the application of D821.

Iviplast 66


SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)

Do not use IR!

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Plastic Primers

RLD185


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between


20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104

Notes: • Apply 2 light coats, reducing the pressure of the spraygun if required, using D821 as a primer-surfacer. • Ensure that the D821 covers the complete repair area. • After flash-off, dry using Infrared. Intermediate Sanding

After drying the complete

surface is flatted

See “Sanding and Cleaning” P400 P800


cloth


cloth RLD63


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between


20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or







TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181





MCC Smart: Plastic repair system with flattable Surfacer

Substrates

Body Panels (TPO and PP-T20)

Body Panels, repaired (TPO and PP-T20)1)

Detachable Body Parts (ASA, ASA/PC) OE Finish

Cleaning / Sanding D846 D8434

D846 D8434

D846 D8434

D846 D8434

Stopper / Filler Iviplast 66 Primer Deltron D820 / D8420 Deltron D820 / D8420 Deltron D820 / D8420

Surfacer Deltron Greymatic NS / MS (flex)

Deltron Greymatic NS / MS (flex)

Deltron Greymatic NS / MS (flex)

Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)

Envirobase (High Performance)








1) Please refer to the chapter "Repair of Plastic Parts" to find more details about the repairing of plastic parts with the approved MB Plastic Repair Kit.




cloth


cloth


to part


RLD241V






RLD241V

Iviplast 66


SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)

Do not use IR!

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Plastic Primers

RLD185


D820: ready-for-use

D8420: aerosol can,

ready-for-use

D820: 1,3 – 1,6 mm

1 – 2 coats (3 – 7 µm)

D820: 30 min. (20°C)

D8420: 20 min. (20°C)



RLD165V




Deltron Greymatic NS flex

3:1,5:1 with D802 and D814

90 min. 16 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 1 – 2 coats (50 – 100 µm)



25 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD177

or

Deltron Greymatic MS flex

4:1:1 with D841 and D814

75 min. 20 – 30” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 1 – 2 coats (50 – 100 µm)



30 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD193

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or

Deltron D8138 – UHS Premium Clearcoat (HS Hardener)


D897 and D807

up to 90 min. 18 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)



30–40 min. (60°C),

8-15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD237V





MCC Smart: Repair system for metal framework (Tridion cell) with flattable or WOW Surfacer, including windshield and glass roof repair

Substrates



Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77

Primer-Surfacer

Deltron D8012 or

Delfleet F3990 / -91 / -74

Deltron D8012 or

Delfleet F3990 / -91 / -74

Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)







Note: in the event of windshield repair, please refer to the section at the end of this document.





cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


8:1:2 with D8212 / T494 (T495)

1,5 – 2 hours 25 – 35” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 2 – 3 coats (50 µm)


coats


P360 – P500 Edges: P1200 RLD239V

or

Delfleet F3990/F3991/F3974 – EP Primer-Surfacer

4:1:1,5 with F3296 / F3342

4 – 6 hours 18 – 22” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (50 – 75 µm)

10-15 min. between

coats, 10-15 min. before

baking


P320 – P400 RLD197V




Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or

Deltron D8138 – UHS Premium Clearcoat (HS Hardener)


D897 and D807

up to 90 min. 18 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 2 coats (50 – 60 µm)



30–40 min. (60°C),

8-15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD237V

Windshield Repair

In the event of windshield repair, please follow the following procedures: • Remove windshield and (if available) the glass roof. • Sand down the OE paint system (tridion cell frame) to a film build of about 50 µm; this is somewhere in the e-

coat area with some remaining surfacer. • Apply one of the EP primer and cure according to PDS prior to masking off area that will accept windshield

adhesive. Please note that once rest of surrounding repair is complete this primed area must cure 12-16 hours prior to windshield adhesive application.

• Mask off the areas where the new adhesive will be applied (described in the SMART Service Information, along with suitable tape / masking material).

Apply the topcoat system as described above and in the PDS.

Remove masking and apply adhesive directly to the EP primer install the windshield and glass roof. Note: primer must dry 12-16 hours prior to application of the windshield adhesive.


PPG – Daimler AG Paint Manuals Mercedes-Benz Cars and Vans [EC] Page 1 of 4

© PPG Industries Inc. [English] 1709 / May 2013


Designo Magno Colors: Warranty repair system with flattable Surfacer and process for matt finish

VOC compliant

Substrates













Clearcoat(s) Blend of Deltron D8115/D8117

Blend of Deltron D8115/D8117




Clearcoat(s) for Matt Dual Clearcoat System*

DeltronD893 Blend of

Deltron D8115/D8117


Deltron D8115/D8117


Deltron D8115/D8117


Deltron D8115/D8117


Deltron D8115/D8117

Note

• It is essential to apply colour panels to check gloss level and colour achieved in the specific bodyshop environment prior to repairing the specific vehicle.

• Test panels MUST be produced using the intended hardener/thinner/ratio/spraygun combination to check for colour and gloss level against the vehicle to repair.

• When choosing the color panel for gloss level, it is best to choose something slightly higher in gloss rather than lower





cloth


cloth RLD63



Use D837 or D845 if

heavily soiled Ready for use


cloth


cloth RLD63V

Galvaplast 77


Apply D8012 over bare

metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185V





1:1 with D832

/ D833 (0,2 D866 if necessary)


(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V


6:1:1,5 with D841 and D807

50 min. 25”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (80 – 140 µm)



30 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD193V RLD254V

or


3:1:0.5 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)



25 min. (60°C) P400 – P500 RLD177

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or


Use tack rag. Check colour to adjacent

parts


TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213V RLD229V




Matt Clearcoat System General notes: Gloss Level Mix Ratio – Deltron D8115 / D8117

D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)

To achieve the correct gloss

level: See mix ratios

on TDS

NOTE: Filter in sprayguns must be avoided for gravity

guns. Use a pre filtering process with a 190µm filter

RLD274

Normal Matt Clearcoat System

This process can be used for full side repairs or full resprays. Deltron D8115 / D8117 Blend

Use tack rag 4:1:2 with D841 and

D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP

2 coats + control coat (45 – 55 µm)

30 min. between cts.,


Note: Flash off until

completely matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)

Do not polish matt finish! RLD274

or

Matt Dual Clearcoat System

Suitable for small /medium repairs where also basecoat is used with fadeout method.

Step 2 - Deltron D8115 / D8117 Blend (Dual Clearcoat Process)


D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP

1 coat + control coat (25 – 30 µm)


Note: When

completely matt before

baking

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)


Step 1 - Deltron D893 – Performance Clear (Dual Clearcoat Process)


D841 and D807

up to 45 min./ 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm

1 coat (25 – 30 µm)

30 min. flash off RLD242




Notes

• Matt finishes present a number of obstacles in the repair process, including: o Variation in gloss across the vehicle body can mean more than one gloss level for repairing. o Gloss variation is not always easily visible before the repair is made. o The gloss level can change in service over time depending on cleaning / maintenance.

• Matt clearcoats contain raw materials to reduce gloss and contribute to the colour match. o This means the colour match involves a basecoat + clearcoat combination. o Different clearcoat film builds can also cause a colour shift when applied over OE clearcoat. o It is essential to apply colour panels to check gloss level and colour achieved in the specific bodyshop

environment prior to repairing the specific vehicle. o When choosing the color panel for gloss level, it is best to choose something slightly higher in gloss

rather than lower

*Matt Dual

Clearcoat Systems • The Matt Dual Clearcoat System special paint process has been developed particularly for repairing MB 0 056

Designo-Magno-Nachtschwarz. o Full resprays can be carried out with the normal matt clearcoat process. o Application of the dual clearcoat system is by two normal coats plus control coat, whilst application of

the full matt clearcoat system should be two full wet coats plus control coat.

• Matt Clearcoat must be flashed off until completely matt between coats and before bake to ensure an even matt finish.

o Clearcoat flash off times can be 30 minutes to 1 hour depending on repair type and size. o This is especially important on larger horizontal areas.

• Jobs must be kept extremely clean. o Any dirt inclusions must be removed before the final coat of clearcoat. o This can be during the basecoat stage OR after the first coat of clearcoat has flashed off well. o Dirt nibs cannot be polished out of the final coat. o In these cases the job must be re-prepared and the full repair area carefully re-applied with clearcoat.





Warranty Paint Repair System for Vehicles with heat-sensitive Power Trains (hybrid drive, Liquid Petroleum Gas (LPG), fuel cell)

Some vehicles using new types of ecologic power trains like hybrid drive, fuel cell or Liquid Petroleum Gas (LPG) are sensitive to higher temperatures and need special attention in the paint shop. Besides recommending IR curing where applicable, listed below PPG offers an efficient 50°C repair system and 50°C baking schedules for all Mercedes-Benz approved products.

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77

Primer Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Deltron D831 (rub-through)

Primer-Surfacer Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 (rub-through)

Surfacer, sanding Deltron Greymatic NS / MS



Surfacer, WOW Deltron DP4000 Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)






Clearcoat(s) Deltron D893 Deltron D893 Deltron D893 Deltron D893 Deltron D893





cloth


cloth RLD63

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)

IR med.: 5-6 IR short.: 4-5

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats

(15 – 20 µm)

5 min. between

coats

30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with

PPG 2K Primers

RLD10V


3:1:0,5 with D802 and D807

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)

10 min. between


55 min. (50°C) P400 – P500 RLD177




or


4:1:1 with D841 and D807

75 min. 20 – 30” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (80 – 140 µm)

10 min. between


55 min. (50°C) P400 – P500 RLD193

or use for new e-coated parts

Deltron DP4000 – 2K Primer (Scuffing Mode)

2:1:0,5

with D8238 and

D807/66, D8718

(Use slowest hardener /

thinner option for Gas-IR)


D831 (RLD10V) for rub-through

areas

1 hour 16 – 18” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,2 – 1,3 mm 1 – 2 coats (25 – 35 µm)

over night (20°C)

Bake (60°C): 30 min.

Light scuffing with fine pad RLD249V

IR short / med.: 5 min. flash-off,

10 min. cure 1x Envirobase

ExpressDry Cycle (6-8 min.)

Gas-IR: 50 cm, 110°C

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)

10 min. between

coats, 15 min. before

clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

40 min. (50°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242




IR med. / 20°C / 50°C Baking Schedules for other MB approved Products: Use these baking times in the case you are using other PPG products than those listed above. Primers / Surfacers:

Product Code Hardener Thinner Drying Time (IR med.)

Drying Time (20°C)

Drying Time (50°C)

Greymatic (MS) D8018 / D8019 / D8024

D864 D803 / D841 / D861 D8718 / D807 20 min. Over Night (TDS) 45 min.

55 min. Greymatic (NS) D8018 / D8019 / D8024

D863 D802 D807 15 min. Over Night (TDS) 45 min.

55 min. D8012 Primer D8012 T494 Only Flash-off Only Flash-off n/a D8012 Primer-Surfacer D8012 T494 12 – 15 min. Over Night (TDS) 60 min. DP4000 D8501 / D8505 / D8507 D8238 / D8239 D866 / D807 / D812

or D8718 / D8719 5 min. flash / 10 min. cure Only Flash-off n/a

Clearcoats:

Product Code Hardener Thinner Drying Time (IR med.)

Drying Time (20°C)

Drying Time (50°C)

Deltron D8105 D8215 - 15 – 20 min. Over Night (TDS) 55 min.

Deltron D8122 D897 D8208 D807 15 min. Over Night (TDS) 55 min.

45 min.

Deltron D8138 HS D897 D8208

D807 / D812 / D869 or D8718 / D8719 8 – 15 min. Over Night (TDS) 70 min.

50 min.

Deltron D893 HS D897 D808 / D807 / D812 / D869 10 min. Over Night (TDS) 40 min.

Deltron D894 HS D897 D8208

D808 / D807 / D812 / D869 10 min. Over Night (TDS) 60 min.

45 min.



© PPG Industries Inc. [English] 1711 / August 2012

Special Paint Repair System S-11-EC

Preliminary Information

Remember that 3-stage color effect is a combination of light reflection from the ground coat (opaque solid, metallic or pearlescent basecoat) as well as a phenomenon of light transition through the transparent / translucent layer of the midcoat (solid tinted or pearlescent basecoat).

Therefore the film build of the midcoat layers plays an important role in accurate color matching. In practice it means that the sprayer must make a set of test panels with different film build of the midcoat, choose a correct test panel and repair a car with the same number of midcoat layers. This verification process is described in details below.

The processes described below are approved warranty standard processes.

3-Stage Pearl Color Verification

• Preparation

• For all 3-Stage pearlescent colors it is essential to spray a set of test color panels to verify the quality of the color match.

• This should be done prior to commencing the repair. These spray outs will be unique to the sprayer!

• This will ensure:

• The correct shade of ground coat has been selected.

• The correct number of coats of midcoat has been applied (important because the number of coats of midcoat applied has a dramatic effect on the final color and effect of the job).

• Reduced chance of expensive rework through improved color matching.

• Preparation of color verification panels – ground coat

• First select the correct ground coat variant or special.

• Apply the appropriate GreyMatic (D8018 / D8019 / D8024) or DP4000 Primer (D8501 / D8505 / D8507) primer shade to a test panel (see color formulation for recommended shade).

• Refer to relevant PDS: GreyMatic (RLD193V) or DP4000 (RLD249V).

• Make up the ground coat color and thin in the normal way.

• For optimum durability and adhesion 5% of Activator D8260 can be added to the Envirobase High Performance ground coat color before thinning. Please note the potlife of 1 hour.

• Spray the ground coat to opacity onto a test panel and dry.

• If possible try to locate a section on the vehicle which has only ground coat applied e.g. under the bonnet, and assess quality of match. This might not always be the case.

• If the color is different then tint the ground coat to achieve a good color match.

• Apply the matched ground coat over the appropriate GreyMatic Shade test color panel.

• Preparation of color verification panels – midcoat

• Mix the midcoat as per the formula and mix as per the data sheet (refer to relevant PDS – Envirobase High Performance (RLD213V).

• Mask 4 parallel sections on the let-down panel.

• Apply one coat of midcoat. Blow dry.

• Remove 1st layer of masking, apply one coat of midcoat and blow dry.

• Remove 2nd layer of masking, apply one coat of midcoat and blow dry.




3-Stage Pearl Color Verification (cont.)

• Remove 3rd layer of masking, apply one coat of midcoat and blow dry.

• Remove 4th layer of masking and blow dry.

• Flash-off the let-down panel.

• Apply one coat of 2K clearcoat (Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat D8138 or Deltron CeramiClear™ D8105 or Deltron CeramiClear™ D8122 or Premium UHS Clearcoat D8171) the panel and bake or Infrared.

• Refer to relevant PDS: D8138 (RLD237V), D8105 (RLD170V), D8122 (RLD195V) or D8171 (RLD259V).

• Once the clearcoat is dry, compare the test panels to a polished section of the original vehicle adjacent to the repair area.

• Select the panel closest in color to the vehicle.

• Use this number of midcoats on the job.

• Apply paint to final job exactly as for the test panels.

3-Layer Color Panel Repair using Fade-out Technique

• Apply Deltron 2K GreyMatic UHS Prima (D8018, D8019, D8024) with the appropriate GreyMatic Shade (see notes in color formulations) to the panel(s). Flash-off, bake and let the panel(s) cool down to ambient temperature (20°C – 25°C).

• Alternative: use DP4000 Primer (D8501 / D8505 / D8507) with the appropriate GreyMatic Shade (see notes in color formulations) without baking and sanding.

• Refer to relevant PDS: GreyMatic (RLD193V) or DP4000 (RLD249V).

• Use black guide coat and sand using a rotary-orbital sanding machine (3 mm stroke) and P400 – P500 grade paper discs.

• Surface of adjacent panels with OE clearcoat (fade-out areas) must be flattened with sanding paper P800 – P1500 or wet fine sanding disc P3000 or a wet ultrafine pad and a preparation gel, e.g. Deltron D8407 (RLD243V).

• Clean the sanded surface thoroughly with Waterborne low VOC Cleaner D8401 (RLD63V) and wipe-off any remains. Do not let the spirit wipe dry on the surface.

• Apply ground coat as normal and fade into the adjacent panel(s). Ground coat must reach perceived opacity over the recommended Greymatic!

• Allow to dry uniformly and tack-rag before applying midcoat.

• Apply midcoat to the repair area making sure that the paint layer extends beyond the ground coat area. Each coat of midcoat should extend further into the repair area to ensure a good fade-out edge. Apply fully wetted single coats.

• Allow each coat of midcoat to dry fully.

• Allow 5 – 10 minutes flash-off before applying clearcoat.

• Apply clearcoat (Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat D8138 or Deltron CeramiClear™ D8105 or Deltron CeramiClear™ D8122 or Premium UHS Clearcoat D8171) on the whole panel and adjacent parts after necessary flash-off time. Polish the fade-out edges after fully curing of the clearcoat and cooling down.

• Refer to relevant PDS: D8138 (RLD237V), D8105 (RLD170V), D8122 (RLD195V) or D8171 (RLD259V).

PPG will offer an introduction into this special repair in its training courses. In urgent cases please contact your PPG distributor, demonstrator or your local PPG organization for assistance.



© PPG Industries Inc. [English] 1711 / December 2012



Mercedes Designo-Titanium-Alubeam MB 0 047 is a special effect silver colour which gives a “Liquid Metal” appearance.

These repair needs a special paint process. It is possible to paint full bodies, parts or to blend parts.


Deltron GRS Basecoat Designo-Titanium-Alubeam MB 0 047 Repair

Overview o Process-Steps

1. Preparation of substrate

2. Application of 2-stage groundcoat (basecoat and clearcoat)

3. Special sanding process before basecoat application

4. Deltron GRS Basecoat Alubeam application

5. Application first clearcoat layer

6. Intermediate sanding process

7. Application second clearcoat layer

o 1. Preparation of substrate

• Use the conventional process to prepare parts with PPG products ready to apply the basecoat. • Clean the surface with Deltron Cleaner D837 • Refer to relevant PDS: Cleaners (RLD63V)

o 2. Groundcoat

• 2 coats of Deltron GRS Basecoat Color G7 Refer to relevant PDS: Deltron GRS BC (RLD02V)

• Apply one light coat and then one full coat of Deltron Low VOC Performance Clearcoat D893 Clearcoat drying at 60°C recommended Refer to relevant PDS: D893 (RLD242V)

o 3. Special Sanding Process before Basecoat application

• To minimize any scratches and to remove orange peel it is important to sand very carefully. • Use for presanding 3M P1200 dry to remove orange peel to achieve a completely flat surface. • Then for fine sanding use first Mirka Abralon 2000 wet and after 3M Trizact P3000 wet to remove any

scratches.

o 4. Deltron GRS Basecoat Alubeam Application

• Mix basecoat paint as per colour formula and mix as per product data sheet. Refer to relevant PDS: Deltron GRS BC (RLD02V)

• No thinner required, Deltron GRS BC Alubeam paint is ready for use.. • Spraygun set-up: SATA 4000 HVLP 1,0 – 1,1mm, 1,6 – 1,8 bar • Clean the surface with Deltron Cleaner D837

Refer to relevant PDS: Cleaners (RLD63V) • Apply 2- 3 single coats to coverage at 1,8 bar with gun fully open and flash off between coats • Apply one double cross coat at 1,6 bar with gun 1 ¼ - 1 ½ turns open • Flash off before clearcoat 20- 30 minutes. • To blend the basecoat, apply the first single coat to the primed area, then extend each subsequent coat

a little further into the blend area using normal blending techniques to achive an even blend into the original color.




o 5. Application first clearcoat layer

• Apply Deltron Low VOC Performance Clearcoat D893 observing the following paint process. Refer to relevant PDS: D893 (RLD242V)

• Apply the 1st coat as a light mist coat. Avoid wetting this first coat too much as over-application can disturb the basecoat leading to patchiness.

• Leave to flash off for 15- 20 minutes at 23°C. • Apply a 2nd full coat. • Flash off and bake the clearcoat as indicated in the PDS.

o 6. Intermediate Sanding Process for the clearcoat

• To achieve the smooth final finish it is necessary to sand the first clearcoat layer and apply a second clearcoat layer

• Use for presanding 3M 260L P1200 dry to remove orange peel to achieve a completely flat surface. • Then for fine sanding use Mirka Abralon 2000 to remove any scratches.

o 7. Application second clearcoat layer

• Apply Deltron CeramiClear™ D8122 following the paint process in the product datasheet. Refer to relevant PDS: D8122 (RLD195V)

• Polish if necessary after curing the clearcoat and cooling.






Mercedes Designo-Titanium-Alubeam MB 0 047 is a special effect silver colour which gives a “Liquid Metal” appearance.

These repair needs a special paint process. It is possible to paint full bodies, parts or to blend parts.


Envirobase High Performance Basecoat Designo-Titanium-Alubeam MB 0 047 Repair

Overview o Process-Steps

1. Preparation of substrate

2. Application of 2-stage groundcoat (basecoat and clearcoat)

3. Special sanding process before basecoat application

4. Envirobase High Performance Basecoat Alubeam application

5. Application first clearcoat layer

6. Intermediate sanding process

7. Application second clearcoat layer

o 1. Preparation of substrate

• Use the conventional process to prepare parts with PPG products ready to apply the basecoat. • Clean the surface with Deltron Cleaner D837 and after with D8401 • Refer to relevant PDS: Cleaners (RLD63V)

o 2. Groundcoat

• 2 coats of Envirobase High Performance Basecoat Color G7 Refer to relevant PDS: Envirobase High Performance (RLD213V)

• Apply one light coat and then one full coat of Deltron Low VOC Performance Clearcoat D893 Clearcoat drying at 60°C recommended Refer to relevant PDS: D893 (RLD242V)

o 3. Special Sanding Process before Basecoat application

• To minimize any scratches and to remove orange peel it is important to sand very carefully. • Use for presanding 3M P1200 dry to remove orange peel to achieve a completely flat surface. • Then for fine sanding use first Mirka Abralon 2000 wet and after 3M Trizact P3000 wet to remove any

scratches.

o 4. Envirobase High Performance Basecoat Alubeam Application

• Mix basecoat paint as per colour formula and mix as per product data sheet. Refer to relevant PDS: Envirobase High Performance (RLD213V)

• Thin paint 50% with T494. • Spraygun set-up: SATA 4000 RP 1,0 mm, 2 bar • Clean the surface with Deltron Cleaner D837 and then with D8401

Refer to relevant PDS: Cleaners (RLD63V) • Apply 1st double cross coat at 2 bar with gun 1 ¼ turns open and flash off until matt • Apply 2nd double cross coat at 2 bar with gun 1 ¼ turns open and flash off until matt • Dry between the both coats completely to matt. Do not apply the basecoat wet-on-wet. • At this stage the metallic control must be even and free from patches.

If not it is necessary to apply a further double cross coat. • Finish the basecoat application with triple mist coats at 2 bar with ¾ turns open and flash off until matt. • Care should be taken to apply this final mist layer very dry and even without any “wetting up” of the

basecoat. • Flash off before clearcoat 20- 30 minutes and if possible run through Fast Aquadry or similar cycle. • To blend the basecoat, apply the first double cross coat to the primed area, then extend each

subsequent coat a little further into the blend area using normal blending techniques to achive an even blend into the original color. As with full panel application care should be taken to apply this final basecoat blended edge very dry and even without any “wetting up” of the basecoat.




o 5. Application first clearcoat layer

• Apply Deltron Low VOC Performance Clearcoat D893 observing the following paint process. Refer to relevant PDS: D893 (RLD242V)

• Apply the 1st coat as a light mist coat. Avoid wetting this first coat too much as over-application can disturb the basecoat leading to patchiness.

• Leave to flash off for 15- 20 minutes at 23°C. • Apply a 2nd full coat. • Flash off and bake the clearcoat as indicated in the PDS.

o 6. Intermediate Sanding Process for the clearcoat

• To achieve the smooth final finish it is necessary to sand the first clearcoat layer and apply a second clearcoat layer

• Use for presanding 3M 260L P1200 dry to remove orange peel to achieve a completely flat surface. • Then for fine sanding use Mirka Abralon 2000 to remove any scratches.

o 7. Application second clearcoat layer

• Apply Deltron CeramiClear™ D8122 following the paint process in the product datasheet. Refer to relevant PDS: D8122 (RLD195V)

• Polish if necessary after curing the clearcoat and cooling.


PPG – Daimler AG Paint Manuals Mercedes-Benz [GBL] Page 1 of 6

© PPG Industries Inc. [Master] 1801 / February 2013

Plastic Repair System PLW-01-GBL

Repair system with flattable Surfacer, for all pre-primed plastic substrates or spare parts

Substrates Preprimed (Spare Parts) Bare Plastic Plastic with major Defects Repaired Plastic1)


Surfacer Deltron D821

Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Delfleet 350

Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)


Clearcoat(s)


Deltron D8115/17 Deltron D8120 Delfleet F3460


General Information on Cleaning:

The key to successful painting of plastic substrates is thorough preparation. Inadequate cleaning is especially likely to cause adhesion failure when a plastic substrate is involved.

• Wash all surfaces with soap and water • If the surface of the plastic substrate appears inconsistant, it is recommended that the part be ‘flamed’ or pre-

stoved for 30 minutes at 60°C. This will drive any residual release agents to the surface for easier removal during the cleaning process.

• Clean the plastic surface carefully and thoroughly with D846 DX103 Degreasing Agent for Plastics. Clean each section individually wiping on D846 with a clean cloth and removing it another clean dry cloth. For textured or other uneven surfaces, the use of a fine nylon brush (such as a nailbrush) is recommended.

RLD241V

Notes: • It is strongly recommended not to steam clean the paint finish within 6 weeks after application and drying. After that time keep a

minimum distance of 30 cm between the jet nozzle and the paint surface.

• It may be necessary to flexibilize the clearcoat / topcoat with D814 (not for D8105 or D8122).

• Plastic parts are not originally painted with a scratch resistant clearcoat like CeramiClear™.

• In the case that both metal and plastic body parts on one car need to be repaired, it is recommended due to efficiency reasons to repaint the plastic parts also with CeramiClear™. Please refer to the Mercedes-Benz Service Information SI98.00-P-0013A.








cloth


cloth RLD63




cloth


cloth


to part


RLD241V


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between


20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104




Passenger Cars and Vans Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or




Gloss Level Mix Ratio – Deltron D8115 / D8117 Matt Clearcoat System

D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)

To achieve the correct gloss level:

See mix ratios on TDS

RLD274

NOTE: Test panels MUST be produced using the intended hardener/thinner/ratio/spraygun combination to check for colour and gloss level against the vehicle to repair. NOTE: Filter in sprayguns must be avoided for gravity guns. Use a pre filtering process with a 190µm filter. Deltron D8115 / D8117 Blend Matt Clearcoat System


D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is

intended only completely

matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)


or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181




Trucks and Buses Delfleet 350


2:1:0,5 with F361 and

F372

8 hrs. 15 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (40 – 60 µm)


coats, 15 – 20 min.

before baking

40 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD51

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V


D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)





matt

or

Delfleet F3460 – UHS Clearcoat

Use tack rag 3,5:1 with F3278

90 min. 17 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (50 – 75 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD207V





Repair system with flattable Surfacer, for all flexible and semi-rigid plastic substrates

Substrates Bare Plastic Plastic with major Defects Repaired Plastic1)




Stopper / Filler Iviplast 66 Iviplast 66

Primer Deltron D820 Deltron D8420



Surfacer Deltron D821 Deltron D821 Deltron D821


Deltron GRS DG Delfleet 350






Clearcoat(s)








The following Plastic Types can be repaired with this Repair System:

ABS ASA PA PA6 PA-GF15 PA6-MD30 PA6-GF20-M20 PA/PPE

PA/PPO PBT PBTP PBT-GF PC PC/ABS PC/PBT PC/PPO

PPA PP/EPDM PPO PRIM PRIM-GF20 PS PUR/RIM-GF20 PUR-GF

PUR, soft RIM TPO






RLD241V

Notes: • This repair system PLW02 can be used if one of the plastic types has been repaired with one of the Mercedes-Benz approved plastic repair

kits (SI98.20-Z-0002A bzw. SI98.20-N-0001A).

• It is strongly recommended not to steam clean the paint finish within 6 weeks after application and drying. After that time keep a minimum distance of 30 cm between the jet nozzle and the paint surface.












RLD241V




cloth


cloth


to part


RLD241V

Iviplast 66


SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)

Do not use IR!

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Plastic Primers

RLD185


D820: ready-for-use

D8420: aerosol can,

ready-for-use

D820: 1,3 – 1,6 mm

1 – 2 coats (3 – 7 µm)

D820: 30 min. (20°C)

D8420: 20 min. (20°C)



RLD165V


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between


20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104






3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or





D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)


or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181






2:1:0,5 with F361 and

F372

8 hrs. 15 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (40 – 60 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD51

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V


D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)





matt

or



90 min. 17 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (50 – 75 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD207V





Repair system with flattable Surfacer, for rigid plastic substrates





Stopper / Filler Iviplast 66 Iviplast 66 Surfacer Deltron D821 Deltron D821 Deltron D821








Clearcoat(s)









PC PES-GF RTM RTPU SMC SMC-GF30 UP-GRP (GFK) CF






RLD241V

Notes: • This repair system PLW03 can be used if one of the plastic types has been repaired with one of the Mercedes-Benz approved plastic repair














RLD241V




cloth


cloth


to part


RLD241V

Iviplast 66


SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)

Do not use IR!

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Plastic Primers

RLD185


Untinted: 3:1:1

Tinted (DG): 3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between


20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104






3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or





D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)


or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181






2:1:0,5 with F361 and

F372

8 hrs. 15 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (40 – 60 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD51

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V


D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)





matt

or



90 min. 17 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (50 – 75 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD207V




Plastic Repair System PLE-01-GBL

Repair system with flattable or WOW Surfacer, for all pre-primed plastic substrates or spare parts

Substrates Preprimed (Spare Parts) Bare Plastic Plastic with major Defects Repaired Plastic1)


Surfacer Deltron D821 Deltron D821 (WOW)


Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)


Clearcoat(s)









RLD241V













cloth


cloth RLD63




cloth


cloth


to part


RLD241V


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between


20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104

or:


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between

coats

30 – 45 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD104






3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or





D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)


or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181






2:1:0,5 with F361 and

F372

8 hrs. 15 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (40 – 60 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD51

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V


D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)





or



90 min. 17 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (50 – 75 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD207V





Repair system with flattable or WOW Surfacer, for all flexible and semi-rigid plastic substrates










Deltron D821 Deltron D821 (WOW)









Clearcoat(s)









ABS ASA PA PA6 PA-GF15 PA6-MD30 PA6-GF20-M20 PA/PPE

PA/PPO PBT PBTP PBT-GF PC PC/ABS PC/PBT PC/PPO

PPA PP/EPDM PPO PRIM PRIM-GF20 PS PUR/RIM-GF20 PUR-GF

PUR, soft RIM TPO






RLD241V

Notes: • This repair system PLE02 can be used if one of the plastic types has been repaired with one of the Mercedes-Benz approved plastic repair














RLD241V




cloth


cloth


to part


RLD241V

Iviplast 66


SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)

Do not use IR!

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Plastic Primers

RLD185


D820: ready-for-use

D8420: aerosol can,

ready-for-use

D820: 1,3 – 1,6 mm

1 – 2 coats (3 – 7 µm)

D820: 30 min. (20°C)

D8420: 20 min. (20°C)



RLD165V


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between


20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104

or:


Untinted:

3:1:1 Tinted (DG):

3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between

coats

30 – 45 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD104






3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or





D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)


or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181






2:1:0,5 with F361 and

F372

8 hrs. 15 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (40 – 60 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD51

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V


D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)





or



90 min. 17 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (50 – 75 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD207V




Plastic Paint Repair System PLE-03-GBL

Repair system with flattable or WOW Surfacer, for rigid plastic substrates
















Clearcoat(s)









PC PES-GF RTM RTPU SMC SMC-GF30 UP-GRP (GFK) CF






RLD241V

Notes: • This repair system PLE03 can be used if one of the plastic types has been repaired with one of the Mercedes-Benz approved plastic repair














RLD241V




cloth


cloth


to part


RLD241V

Iviplast 66


SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)

Do not use IR!

P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Plastic Primers

RLD185


Untinted: 3:1:1

Tinted (DG): 3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between


20 – 30 min. (60°C) P400 RLD104

or:


Untinted: 3:1:1

Tinted (DG): 3:1:1,5:1

with D841 and D807

3 – 4 hours 18 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 100 µm)

10-15 min. between

coats

30 – 45 min. (20°C)


(60°C)

RLD104






3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or





D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)


or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181






2:1:0,5 with F361 and

F372

8 hrs. 15 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (40 – 60 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD51

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V


D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)





or



90 min. 17 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (50 – 75 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD207V





Repair system for flexible and semi-rigid plastic substrates, bare or primer sand-through areas, no deeper scratches or damages, not repaired.

Substrates Bare Plastic




Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Basecoat(s)


Clearcoat(s)





ASA PA PA6 PA-GF15 PA6-MD30 PA6-GF20-M20 PA/PPE PBT

PBTP PBT-GF PC/PBT PPA PRIM PRIM-GF20 PRIM PUR/RIM-GF20

PUR-GF PUR, soft






RLD241V














RLD241V




cloth


cloth


to part


RLD241V


D820: ready-for-use

D8420: aerosol can,

ready-for-use

D820: 1,3 – 1,6 mm

1 – 2 coats (3 – 7 µm)

D820: 30 min. (20°C)

D8420: 20 min. (20°C)



RLD165V






3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V



Use tack rag

3:1:1 with D841 and

D807

6 hours 17 –18”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1 med. coat,




30 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD160

or



D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

or



D897 and D807

3 – 4 hours 16 – 19” DIN 4mm

(20°C)


(50 – 60 µm)


before baking

30 min. (70°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD100

or





D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)


or



D841 and D807

2 hrs. 16 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,6 mm

1 medium coat,




30 – 40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD181






2:1:0,5 with F361 and

F372

8 hrs. 15 – 17” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (40 – 60 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C),

10 – 15 min. (IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD51

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V


D8115 (Matt): D8117

(Semi-Gloss)



RLD274



D812

1-2 hrs. 15”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,2 – 1,4 mm HVLP




Note: Flash off is


matt

30 – 40 min. (60°C),

8 – 15 min. (IR med.)





or



90 min. 17 – 25” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 1,5 – 2 coats (50 – 75 µm)



before baking

40 min. (60°C), 15 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD207V

Mercedes-Benz

Approved Paint Repair Systems


© PPG Industries Inc. [Master] 1901 / March 2013

S.M.A.R.T. Paint Repair System SRP-01-GBL

S.M.A.R.T. repair system for passenger cars and vans, with EP Primer-Surfacer

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Primer-Surfacer Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Deltron D8012 Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Base-coat(s)




Performance Clearcoat(s) Deltron D893 Deltron D893 Deltron D893 Deltron D893





cloth


cloth RLD63

Preparation For Blending Repairs

• Prepare the area surrounding the repair with a Scotchbrite Ultrafine pad together with PPG WB Flatting Paste D8407 (RLD243V).

• Dip the Scotchbrite pad in clean water, apply Flatting Paste to the pad. • Use the pad to abrade the area around the repair. • Abrade thoroughly until you have removed the gloss.

• Abrade a large enough area to contain the blend. • The blend should never extend beyond the prepared area. • Wipe the area with a clean sponge and water to remove the paste and allow to dry. • Clean the repair area using the appropriate PPG Precleaner.

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


8:1:2 with D8212 / T494 (T495)

1,5 – 2 hours 25 – 35” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,3 – 1,4 mm 2 – 3 coats (50 µm)


coats


P360 – P500 Edges: P1200 RLD239V

Mercedes-Benz




Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron DG Process with D8730 (Aerosol) or D8429

• After normal application the gun is arced away from the panel in the blend area leaving a dry overspray edge. • Apply Clearcoat D893 (RLD242) over color edge. • Use the same hardener in clearcoat as original DG color. After normal application the gun is arced away from the panel in the blend

area leaving a dry overspray clearcoat edge.

• Apply D8730 (Aerosol) or D8429 (RLD199V) to the clearcoat edge, applying in light coats to melt overspray edge. DO NOT apply heavily. Alternatively D868 can be used.

• Allow the paint film to cure. • Polish the blend area with a polishing compound SPP 1001 (T001), taking care not to polish through the blend and finish with a fi-

nishing polish. • Rapid Blender D8429 can be used as an alternative to the Aerosol for those who prefer to use spraygun application. • The process is the same for both the aerosol and blender but using a spraygun to apply the Rapid Blender to the blend edge.

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V

Deltron D893 – Low VOC Performance Clear (Spot Repair)


D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm

1 mist coat, 1 full coat

(50 – 60 µm) Use D868!


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

Deltron Clearcoat Process with D8730 (Aerosol) or D8429

• After normal application the gun is arced away from the panel in the blend area leaving a dry overspray blend. • Apply D8730 (Aerosol) or D8429 (RLD199V) to the clearcoat edge, applying in light coats to melt the overspray edge. DO NOT apply

heavily. Alternatively D868 can be used. • Allow the paint film to cure. • Polish the blend area with a polishing compound SPP 1001 (T001), taking care not to polish through the blend and finish with a fi-

nishing polish.

Mercedes-Benz




S.M.A.R.T. Paint Repair System SRP-02-GBL

S.M.A.R.T. repair system for passenger cars and vans, with Surfacer

Substrates


Cleaning / Sanding Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Deltron D837 Stopper / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77 Primer Deltron D831 Deltron D831 Deltron D831




Topcoat(s) Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Deltron GRS DG Basecoat(s) Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Deltron GRS BC Waterborne Base-coat(s)




Performance Clearcoat(s) Deltron D893 Deltron D893 Deltron D893 Deltron D893





cloth


cloth RLD63

Preparation For Blending Repairs

• Prepare the area surrounding the repair with a Scotchbrite Ultrafine pad together with PPG WB Flatting Paste D8407 (RLD243V).

• Dip the Scotchbrite pad in clean water, apply Flatting Paste to the pad. • Use the pad to abrade the area around the repair. • Abrade thoroughly until you have removed the gloss.

• Abrade a large enough area to contain the blend. • The blend should never extend beyond the prepared area. • Wipe the area with a clean sponge and water to remove the paste and allow to dry. • Clean the repair area using the appropriate PPG Precleaner.

Galvaplast 77



metal

SHA305 2,0 – 2,5 %

(20°C)

7 – 10 min. (20°C)


30 – 40 (20°C)


P80 – P120- P240

Only dry sanding!


Primers RLD185


1:1

with D832 / D833



(20°C) 1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats


30 – 45 min. (20°C)

20 – 30 min. (20°C) with PPG 2K Pri-

mers

RLD10V

Mercedes-Benz




Deltron Greymatic NS (Spot Repair)

3:1:0,5 with D863 and D808

90 min. 17 – 20” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (60 – 140 µm)



25 min. (60°C) , 15 min.

(IR med.)

P400 – P500 RLD177

or

Deltron Greymatic MS (Spot Repair)

4:1:1 with D864 and D808

75 min. 20 – 30” DIN 4mm

(20°C)

1,6 – 1,8 mm 2 – 3 coats (80 – 140 µm)



30 min. (60°C), 20 min.

(IR med.)

P400 – P500 RLD193

Deltron GRS DG


3:1:1 with D841 and D807


(20°C)

1,4 – 1,8 mm 2 coats (55 – 60 µm)



30 min. (60°C)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD01

Deltron DG Process with D8730 (Aerosol) or D8429

• After normal application the gun is arced away from the panel in the blend area leaving a dry overspray edge. • Apply Clearcoat D893 (RLD242) over color edge. • Use the same hardener in clearcoat as original DG color. After normal application the gun is arced away from the panel in the blend

area leaving a dry overspray clearcoat edge.

• Apply D8730 (Aerosol) or D8429 (RLD199V) to the clearcoat edge, applying in light coats to melt overspray edge. DO NOT apply heavily. Alternatively D868 can be used.

• Allow the paint film to cure. • Polish the blend area with a polishing compound SPP 1001 (T001), taking care not to polish through the blend and finish with a fi-

nishing polish. • Rapid Blender D8429 can be used as an alternative to the Aerosol for those who prefer to use spraygun application. • The process is the same for both the aerosol and blender but using a spraygun to apply the Rapid Blender to the blend edge.

Deltron GRS BC



performance

1:1 with D807

15” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,4 – 1,6 mm


(if necessary)


fore clearcoat

RLD02 RLD153

or




TDS

22 – 26” DIN 4mm

(20°C) 1,2 – 1,4 mm


(if necessary)


RLD213 RLD229V

Mercedes-Benz




Deltron D893 – Low VOC Performance Clear (Spot Repair)


D897 and D807

45 min. 16 –19”

DIN 4mm (20°C)

1,3 – 1,6 mm

1 mist coat, 1 full coat

(50 – 60 µm) Use D868!


before baking

20 – 25 min. (60°C), 10 min.

(IR med.)

SPP1001 (T001)


RLD242

Deltron Clearcoat Process with D8730 (Aerosol) or D8429

• After normal application the gun is arced away from the panel in the blend area leaving a dry overspray blend. • Apply D8730 (Aerosol) or D8429 (RLD199V) to the clearcoat edge, applying in light coats to melt the overspray edge. DO NOT apply

heavily. Alternatively D868 can be used. • Allow the paint film to cure. • Polish the blend area with a polishing compound SPP 1001 (T001), taking care not to polish through the blend and finish with a fi-

nishing polish.




Summary of approved Products Cleaning and Pretreatment Product Code Description Datasheet Reference D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe RLD63 D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner RLD63 D8423 Gunwash RLD221V D8434 Plastic Substrate Cleaner RLD241V D845 DX310 High Strength Degreaser RLD63 D846 DX103 Antistatic Agent for Plastics RLD241V T497 Envirobase Gun Cleaner RLD221V Stoppers and Fillers Product Code Description Datasheet Reference A652 Iviplast 66 Flexible Polyester Putty RLD185 A656 Galvaplast 77 Multi Purpose Polyester Filler RLD185 A663 Galvaplast 77 slow RLD185 A664 Universal low Density Stopper RLD196V A712 PE Spray – Polyester Spray Filler RLD179 Primers Product Code Description Datasheet Reference D820 Deltron Plastics Adhesion Promoter RLD165V D831 Universel chromate-free Wash Primer RLD10V D8012 Waterborne Epoxy Primer RLD239V D8420 Deltron Plastics Adhesion Promoter, Aerosol RLD165V Surfacers Product Code Description Datasheet Reference D8018 Greymatic 2K UHS Surfacer – white RLD177, RLD193 D8019 Greymatic 2K UHS Surfacer – anthracite RLD177, RLD193 D8024 Greymatic 2K UHS Surfacer – grey RLD177, RLD193 D821 HS Chip Resistant Primer RLD104 D8501 DP 4000 Primer – white RLD249V D8505 DP 4000 Primer – grey RLD249V D8507 DP 4000 Primer – anthracite RLD249V Topcoats Product Code Description Datasheet Reference D7xx Deltron GRS DG RLD01




Basecoats Product Code Description Datasheet Reference D7xx / D9xx Deltron GRS BC RLD02, RLD153 T4xx Envirobase High Performance waterborne Basecoat RLD213, RLD229V Clearcoats Product Code Description Datasheet Reference D800 Deltron MS Clearcoat RLD160 D8105 Deltron 2K CeramiClearTM RLD170V D8115/D8117 Deltron 2K Matt Clearcoat RLD274 D8120 Deltron HS Clearcoat RLD181 D8122 Deltron 2K CeramiClearTM RLD195 D8138 Deltron UHS Clearcoat RLD237V D8141 Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat RLD204 D893 Deltron Low VOC Performance Clearcoat RLD242 D894 Deltron HS Clearcoat RLD100 Hardeners and reactive Thinners Product Code Description Datasheet Reference A669 Hardener for Universal low Density Stopper RLD196V D802 NS Hardener D803 Fast MS Hardener D8208 HS accelerated Hardener D8212 Hardener for waterborne Epoxy Primer RLD239V D8215 Hardener for CeramiClearTM RLD170V D8216 Deltron UHS Hardener express D8217 Deltron UHS Hardener fast D8218 Deltron UHS Hardener normal D8219 Deltron UHS Hardener slow D8237 Deltron MS Hardener express D8238 Deltron MS Hardener fast D8239 Deltron MS Hardener slow D832 Universel Reactive Thinner RLD10V D833 Universel slow Reactive Thinner RLD10V D841 Medium MS Hardener D861 Slow MS Hardener D863 Accelerated NS Hardener D864 Accelerated MS Hardener D897 Deltron HS Hardener SHA305 Hardener for Galvaplast 77 and Iviplast 66 RLD185 SHA307 Hardener for Polyester Spray Filler RLD179




Thinners Product Code Description Datasheet Reference A714 Thinner for Polyester Spray Filler RLD179 D807 Topcoat Thinner 18-25°C D808 Fast Thinner 5-18°C D812 Slow Thinner 25-35°C D8425 CeramiClearTM Fade-out Thinner RLD170V D8429 Rapid Blender RLD199V D851 BC Fade-out Thinner D866 Thinner for 2K Surfacer D868 DG Fade-out Thinner D869 Very slow Thinner >35°C D8715 DP4000 Productive Thinner RLD249V D8718 Deltron low VOC Thinner medium D8719 Deltron low VOC Thinner slow D8730 GRS Deltron Fade out Thinner, Aerosol RLD199V F3342 Thinner for 2K EP Primer-Surfacer T494 Envirobase Thinner RLD125, RLD213 T495 Envirobase slow Thinner RLD125, RLD213 Ancillaries Product Code Description Datasheet Reference D759 Deltron Matting Base RLD191V D814 Plasticizer D818 Accelerator RLD188V D819 Matt Flexibilizer D8407 WB Flatting Paste RLD243V D843 Texture Additive RLD189V D844 Leather Grain Additive RLD189V D8456 Deltron UHS Matting Base D885 Enhancer RLD188V D886 Potlife Extender RLD188V D899 Antisilicone RLD166V SPP1001 Polishing System T001 T492 High Performance Additive RLD213 T499 Envirobase Coagulant RLD214V




Technical Datasheets – Cars and Vans Index Technical Datasheets Datasheet Reference Product Code Description RLD01 D7xx series GRS Deltron DG 2K acrylic Topcoat RLD02 D7xx, D9xx series GRS Deltron BC solventborne Basecoat RLD100 D894 GRS HS Clearcoat RLD104 D821 GRS HS Chip Resistant Primer RLD10V D831 GRS Universel Wash Primer RLD125 T4xx series Envirobase Basecoat RLD153 DHxxx series GRS Deltron Harlequin Basecoat RLD160 D800 GRS MS Clearcoat RLD165V D820 / D8420 GRS Plastics Adhesion Promoter RLD166V D899 GRS Deltron Antisilicone RLD170V D8105 GRS Deltron 2K CeramiClear™ RLD177 D8018 / -19 / -24 GRS Deltron Greymatic 2K UHS Surfacers NS RLD179 A712 GRS Deltron PE Spray – Polyester Spray Filler RLD181 D8120 GRS HS Clearcoat RLD185 - Stoppers RLD188V D818 / D885 / D886 Deltron Additives RLD189V D843 / D844 GRS Texture Additive / Leather Grain RLD191V D759 GRS Matting Base RLD193 D8018 / -19 / -24 GRS Deltron Greymatic 2K UHS Surfacers MS RLD195 D8122 GRS Deltron 2K CeramiClear™ RLD196V A664 Low Density Stopper RLD197V F3990 / -91 / -74 Delfleet 2K EP Primer-Surfacer RLD199V D8730 / D8429 GRS Deltron Aerosol Fade-out Thinner / Rapid Blender RLD204 D8141 Deltron Premium UHS Clear with standard Thinners RLD213 T4xx series Envirobase High Performance Basecoat RLD214V T499 Envirobase Flocculating Agent RLD274 D8115/8117 GRS Deltron Matt Clearcoat RLD221V D8423 / T497 Equipment Cleaners RLD229V T4xx series Envirobase Ready Mix Color RLD237V D8138 GRS Deltron UHS Clearcoat with HS Hardeners RLD239V D8012 GRS Deltron WB Epoxy Primer RLD241V D8434 / D846 Cleaning and Preparation of Plasic Substrates RLD242 D893 GRS Deltron Low VOC Performance Clearcoat RLD243V D8407 WB Flatting Paste RLD249V D8501 / -05 / -07 2K Primer DP4000 RLD258 D8113 / D8122 GRS Deltron Low Gloss Finish D8113-D8122 RLD63 - Deltron DX Cleaners T001 SPP Polishing System Note: Please visit the PPG Refinish Web Site www.ppgrefinish.com for the actual version of each datasheet.

http://www.ppgrefinish.com/


PPG – Daimler AG Paint Manuals General Information Page 1 of 2


Explanation of Pictograms Pretreatment

Cleaning

Apply Cleaner

Wipe-off Cleaner

Product Preparation

Mixing ratio 2 components

Mixing ratio 2 components 1:1

Mixing ratio 3 components

Use mixing stick

Add hardener / activator

Add additive

Product Properties

Pot life

Application viscosity

Application

Gravity feed spray gun

Gravity feed spray gun, HVLP

Suction feed spray gun

Underseal spray gun

Spray passes gravity feed

Spray passes gravity feed, HVLP

Spray passes suction feed

Filler / stopper application

Brush application

Roller application

Aerosol application

Airless application

Airmix application

Drying

Flash-off time

Air drying

Forced drying

Drying time

Drying time, infrared

Drying time, UV

Re-coat




Explanation of Pictograms Sanding, Flatting and Polishing

De-nibbing

Sanding by hand, dry

Sanding by hand, wet

Orbital sander, dry (compressed air)

Orbital sander, wet (compressed air)

Flat bed sander, dry

Flat bed sander, wet

Polishing

Product Information

See product datasheet

VOC information

Attention / special notes

Product Storing

Store free from frost

Store in a cool place

Protect from humidity

Shelf life

Close tin

Miscellaneous

Stirring

Stirring on mixing machine

Check color

Use gloves

Use fresh air mask

Wear goggles or safety glasses

Check for variants

VOC compliant

Vehicle Repair Systems

Passenger cars

Vans

Buses

Trucks

Light trucks

Heavy-duty trucks




Sanding and Cleaning

Pre-Cleaning: Steel: Remove rust by sandblasting, wire brush or coarse sanding paper (P16 to P80) to achieve a bare substrate. For rust-through areas tinning is recommended. In case of larger damaged areas it might be necessary to weld in a new sheet or to replace the whole part. Remove any remains like scale from welding, tinning or any parting compounds and fluxing agents thoroughly. Aluminium / Magnesium alloys: These metals have the property of reacting with oxygen very quickly. There is the risk of fire and explosion caused by machining (sanding) of these components. Extremly high precautionary measures must be taken when processing aluminium. To avoid contact corrosion, do not sand bare steel and aluminium at the same time using the same sanding disc / paper. It is not recommended to sand any Magnesium alloys!

Cleaning: Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt. Clean with a suitable cleaner. Metal Substrates: • D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe: mild blend of solvents for removing light contamination • D845 (DX310) High Strength Degreaser: is a strong blend of solvents, specifically designed to remove dirt, grease and other

contaminants from bare metal as part of the preparation process • D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner: is a waterborne pre-cleaner, suitable for use as an “in process” cleaner. Plastic Substrates: • D846 (DX103) Antistatic Agent for Plastics: specially designed alcoholic blend of solvents formulated to treat plastic surfaces

without damaging them and to prevent the build up of static, ensuring a dust free finish. • D8434 Plastic Substrate Cleaner: detergent cleaner for removing all types of contaminants (e.g. mould release agents and

traffic film) as a step in the preparatory process to ensure excellent adhesion of subsequent coatings.

Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine): Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges and borders. Use a guide coat for best results: • Steel P120 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad red, 3M Soft Pad superfine • Galvanized Steel P320 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad grey, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Tinned Steel P120 - P220 • Aluminium P150 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad red, 3M Soft Pad superfine • E-Coat (spare parts) P280 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad grey, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine (faultless E-Coat requires only cleaning) • OE Finish / Repair Coatings P240 – P500, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad red, 3M Soft Pad superfine • Putty / Filler Coarse sanding: P120 - P150, fine sanding: P240 - P320 • Spray Polyester Coarse sanding: P150, fine sanding: P240 - P320 • Primer-Surfacer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Surfacer P320 – P500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Topcoat (blending areas) P800 - P1500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad extrafine • Clearcoat (blending areas) P800 - P1500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad extrafine

Wet Sanding (manual): Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges and borders: • E-Coat (spare parts) P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine (faultless E-Coat requires only cleaning) • OE Finish / Repair Coatings P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Putty / Filler NEVER use wet sanding for putties or fillers! • Spray Polyester NEVER use wet sanding for putties or fillers! • Primer-Surfacer P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Surfacer P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Topcoat (blending areas) P1000 - P1200, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Clearcoat (blending areas) P1000 - P1200, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine

Mercedes-Benz Color Information – Cars and Vans

PPG – Daimler AG Paint Manuals Mercedes-Benz Cars and Vans Page 1 of 20


Model 129 SL-Series, Coupé, Roadster (until 09/01)

A Location of Code-Plate 1 MB Color Code 2 Code Letter for Paint

M = Metallic F = Solid H = Hydrobasecoat




Model 140 S-Series, Sedan (until 08/98)

A Location of Code-Plate (A-Post, outside, Vehicle Side can vary specific to Country)

1 MB Color Code 2 Code Letter for Paint


B Location of Sticker for Vehicles with Special Colors




Model 163 M-Series


1 MB Color Code





Model 168 A-Series


1 MB Color Code




Model 170 SLK-Series, Coupé, Convertible


1 MB Color Code

B Location of Sticker for Vehicles with Special Colors Important note: A "C" before the color code indicates that this car has been sprayed with PPG's CeramiClearTM scratch resistant clearcoat and requires a special repair process. For more details see SI98.00-P-0007A.




Model 202 C-Series, Sedan and Station Wagon (until 08/98)








Model 203.0 C-Series, Sedan, (from 05/00)








Model 203.2 C-Series, Station Wagon / T-Model, (from 06/00)








Model 203.7 C-Series, Coupé, (from 03/01)








Model 208.3 CLK-Series, Coupé








Model 208.4 CLK-Series, Convertible








Model 209 CLK-Series, Coupé (from 05/02)






Model 210 E-Series, Sedan and Station Wagon / T-Model








Model 210.08 / .28 E-Series, Sedan and Station Wagon (4-MATIC)








Model 211 E-Series, Sedan (from 03/02)






Model 215 CL-Series, Coupé






Model 220 S-Series, Sedan (since 08/98)






Model 230 SL-Series, Coupé / Roadster (from 10/01)

1 Location of Code-Plate (A-Post, outside, Vehicle Side can vary specific to Country)

2 Location of Sticker for Vehicles with Special Colors Important note: A "C" before the color code indicates that this car has been sprayed with PPG's CeramiClearTM scratch resistant clearcoat and requires a special repair process. For more details see SI98.00-P-0007A.




Model 461 G-Series

A Location of Code-Plate (B-Post, outside, Vehicle Side can vary specific to Country)




Model 463 G-Series

A Location of Code-Plate (B-Post, outside, Vehicle Side can vary specific to Country)

Mercedes-Benz Repair of Plastic Parts – Cars and Vans



Introduction Plastic Repair Kit (Plastic Repair Box) for Passenger Cars With the approved plastic repair kit(s) it is possible to repair all damages such as cracks, holes or very deep scratches (> 1 mm) on painted (or colored) plastic body components of Mercedes-Benz Passenger Cars.

1. Bumper Covering

2. Bumper Guards

3. Deep Scratches (> 1 mm)

4. Crack

5. Hole (< 40 mm)

However, it is not possible to repair all types of plastic and parts when the substrate is damaged. The following parts can be repaired with the repair kit:

• Front Bumper • Rear Bumper • Front Fender Left • Front Fender Right

Note: When repaired properly the repaired plastic parts correspond completely to Mercedes-Benz technical requirements. The repairs to be performed, however, should be economically logical. The costs for labor and material (not including paintwork) should not exceed 75 % of the price for the replacement part. Please refer to the vehicle’s datasheets to find the corresponding paint system. Please refer to SI88.00-P-0001A for more details.

Mercedes-Benz Repair of Plastic Parts – Cars and Vans



Plastic Types and Repair Systems

P01 Warranty repair system with flattable or WOW Surfacer, for all pre-primed plastic subtrates or spare parts

P02 (P02a, P02r) Warranty repair system with flattable or WOW Surfacer, for all flexible and semi-rigid plastic substrates

ABS ASA PA PA6 PA-GF15 PA6-MD30 PA6-GF20-M20 PA/PPE PA/PPO PBT PBTP PBT-GF

PC PC/ABS PC/ASA PC/PBT PC/PPO PPA PP/EPDM PPO

PRIM PRIM-GF20 PS PUR/RIM-GF20 PUR-GF PUR, soft RIM TPO

P03 (P03a, P03r) Warranty repair system with flattable or WOW Surfacer, for rigid plastic substrates

PC (see below) PES-GF PS (see below) RTM RTPU SMC SMC-GF30 UP-GRP (GFK)

P04 Economic repair system for flexible and semi-rigid plastic substrates, bare or primer sand-through areas, no deeper scratches or damages, not repaired

ASA PA PA6 PA-GF15 PA6-MD30 PA6-GF20-M20 PA/PPE PBT

PBTP PBT-GF PC/ASA PC/PBT PPA PRIM PRIM-GF20 PUR/RIM-GF20

PUR-GF PUR, soft Note: The following plastic types are used for special applications or are regarded to be difficult to paint:

• solvent sensitive plastics like some PC types or PS (in some cases it might be possible to paint some of these plastic grades using D8012 waterborne EP Primer).

• clear, transparent and not painted plastic types like PC or PMMA. • colored plastic types like PP (less than 20% mineral filled), PE or POM. • plastic types that require a special surface pretreatment when they are painted like PE or PP. • PE and PP can not be painted without surface pretreatment or being pre-primed with an OE plastic

primer. Today PPGs recommendation is to replace bare, damaged or repaired plastic parts of these types against spare parts that are preprimed with an OE plastic primer. In the case of preprimed parts please refer to the repair system P01 to find the appropriate repair procedure.

PPG Hotline and National Organization



PPG Hotline and National Organization for [Country]

Commercial and Marketing Support (PPG local HQ)

[Company] [Contact] [Street Address] [P.O. Box] [ZIP] [City] [State] [Phone] [Fax] [E-Mail]

Technical and Training Support


Color Support


Hotline


[Please enter the information about your local or regional support in the table above]

PPG Web Site: www.ppg.com PPG Refinish Web Site: www.ppgrefinish.com

http://www.ppg.com/


PPG Distribution Network



PPG Distribution Network for [Country]





[Please enter the information about your local or regional distribution network in the table above]




Sanding and Cleaning

Pre-Cleaning: Steel: Remove rust by sandblasting, wire brush or coarse sanding paper (P16 to P80) to achieve a bare substrate. For rust-through areas tinning is recommended. In case of larger damaged areas it might be necessary to weld in a new sheet or to replace the whole part. Remove any remains like scale from welding, tinning or any parting compounds and fluxing agents thoroughly. Aluminium / Magnesium alloys: These metals have the property of reacting with oxygen very quickly. There is the risk of fire and explosion caused by machining (sanding) of these components. Extremly high precautionary measures must be taken when processing aluminium. To avoid contact corrosion, do not sand bare steel and aluminium at the same time using the same sanding disc / paper. It is not recommended to sand any Magnesium alloys!

Cleaning: Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt. Clean with a suitable cleaner. Metal Substrates: • D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe: mild blend of solvents for removing light contamination • D845 (DX310) High Strength Degreaser: is a strong blend of solvents, specifically designed to remove dirt, grease and other

contaminants from bare metal as part of the preparation process • D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner: is a waterborne pre-cleaner, suitable for use as an “in process” cleaner. Plastic Substrates: • D846 (DX103) Antistatic Agent for Plastics: specially designed alcoholic blend of solvents formulated to treat plastic surfaces

without damaging them and to prevent the build up of static, ensuring a dust free finish. • D8434 Plastic Substrate Cleaner: detergent cleaner for removing all types of contaminants (e.g. mould release agents and

traffic film) as a step in the preparatory process to ensure excellent adhesion of subsequent coatings.

Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine): Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges and borders. Use a guide coat for best results: • Steel P120 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad red, 3M Soft Pad superfine • Galvanized Steel P320 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad grey, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Tinned Steel P120 - P220 • Aluminium P150 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad red, 3M Soft Pad superfine • E-Coat (spare parts) P280 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad grey, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine (faultless E-Coat requires only cleaning) • OE Finish / Repair Coatings P240 – P500, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad red, 3M Soft Pad superfine • Putty / Filler Coarse sanding: P120 - P150, fine sanding: P240 - P320 • Spray Polyester Coarse sanding: P150, fine sanding: P240 - P320 • Primer-Surfacer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Surfacer P320 – P500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Topcoat (blending areas) P800 - P1500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad extrafine • Clearcoat (blending areas) P800 - P1500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine, 3M Scotch-Brite™ pad extrafine

Wet Sanding (manual): Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges and borders: • E-Coat (spare parts) P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine (faultless E-Coat requires only cleaning) • OE Finish / Repair Coatings P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Putty / Filler NEVER use wet sanding for putties or fillers! • Spray Polyester NEVER use wet sanding for putties or fillers! • Primer-Surfacer P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Surfacer P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Topcoat (blending areas) P1000 - P1200, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine • Clearcoat (blending areas) P1000 - P1200, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine

These products are for professional use only RLD01 Page 1

GLOBAL REFINISH SYSTEM

May 2006

Product Information GRS Deltron DG Direct Gloss 2-Pack acrylic colour

PRODUCTS Deltron Direct Gloss Tinters D7xx Deltron Medium Solids Hardeners D803, D841, D861 Deltron Accelerated Medium Solids Hardener D864 Deltron Standard Solids Hardener D802 Deltron Accelerated Standard Solids Hardener D863 Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869 Deltron DG Fade-out Thinner D868 Deltron Accelerator D818

For matt, satin and textured finishes or painting of flexible substrates: Deltron Matting Base D759 to create a matt or satin appearance Deltron Plasticiser D814 to plasticise finishes over a flexible substrate Deltron Matt Flexibiliser D819 to create a matt or satin appearance over a flexible

substrate Deltron Texture Additive D843 to create a fine textured ‘suede’ effect Deltron Leather Grain Additive D844 to create a coarser, more pronounced textured finish

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deltron DG is a high-performance durable two-pack acrylic urethane topcoat designed for the repair and repainting of direct gloss.

Deltron DG can be accelerated to maintain fast curing at low temperature, or to speed-up process times for small to medium repairs under normal temperature. In order to accelerate the curing. Accelerated hardeners (D863 - D864) and D818 Accelerator can be used separately or in combination. D863/D864 hardeners are used as replacement for Standard or MS hardeners in the Deltron mix. D818 Accelerator is an additive which is added to the ready mixed paint or to the thinner.


PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE

Apply over original stoved finishes or over recommended PPG primers.

Degrease all surfaces to be painted with appropriate PPG substrate cleaner before wet sanding with P600-800 grade paper or dry sanding with P400-500 grade paper.

Wash off residues and dry thoroughly before re-cleaning with appropriate PPG substrate cleaner. See Technical Data Sheet RLD63 Deltron Cleaners. The use of a tack rag is recommended.

MIXING RATIOS 1. Mixing ratios with Standard System By Volume DG 2 vol D802 1 vol Thinner** 1 vol* 2. Mixing ratios with MS System By Volume DG 3 vol MS Hardener** 1 vol Thinner** 1 vol*

* For high build, use 0.5 vol.

** Choose MS Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Temperature MS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D803 Fast D808 18°C - 25°C D841 Medium D807 Over 25°C D861 Slow D812 For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) the use of Very Slow Thinner D869 is recommended.

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Standard System MS System Potlife at 20°C: 6 - 8 hours 6 hours Spray viscosity at 20°C: 15 seconds DIN4 17 - 18 seconds DIN4

SPRAYGUN SET UP 1.4 - 1.8 mm Fluid Tip - Pressure as per manufacturers recommendations


NUMBER OF COATS With NS Hardener, apply 1 light coat, followed by 2 full coats, to give a dry film thickness of 45 - 50 microns. With MS Hardener, apply 1 medium coat followed by 1 full coat, to give a dry film thickness of 55 - 60 microns.

FLASH OFF TIMES 5 minutes between each coat. 10 minutes before stoving / baking.

DRYING TIMES Dust Free at 20°C 20 minutes with NS Hardener, 30 minutes with MS Hardener Through dry at 20°C 20 hours with either NS or MS Hardener. Through dry at 60°C* 30 minutes with either NS or MS Hardener Infra Red Drying 10 - 15 minutes, depending upon colour.

• Stoving times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the stoving schedule, to allow metal to reach recommended temperature.

Drying times may be further reduced by using the GRS Deltron accelerated systems. See the Deltron DG Accelerated Systems section of this TDS.

OVERCOATING / RECOATING Overcoat / Recoat time - If Force dried, after cooling, or after Air drying at 20°C for 8 hours. It is essential to sand before recoating to ensure good adhesion. Sand with P800 (wet) or P400 (Dry). Overcoat with - Any PPG 2K primer, GRS Deltron topcoats, or Envirobase.

SPOT REPAIR PROCEDURE

• Apply GRS Deltron DG according to the details given above. • Leave to flash off for 10 minutes at 20°C after the second full coat. • A suitable quantity of activated and thinned DG colour should be further reduced with

GRS Deltron DG Fade Out Thinner D868 at a ratio of 1:3 (1 part activated DG to 3 parts D868)

• Apply this 1:3 mix over the repair area, using a reduced gun pressure to minimise overspray; Spray from the outside of the repair inwards, covering an area that extends beyond the edge of the initial application.

• After force drying or IR buff the repair edges.


Global at a Glance DG GRS Deltron Direct Gloss Topcoat

Mixing by volume

With NS Hardener - 2:1:0.5 or 2:1:1 With MS Hardener - 3:1:0.5 or 3:1:1 Pot Life at 20°C 6 - 8 hours with D802, D803 or D841 Pot Life at 20°C 3 - 4 hours with D864, or D863 Hardener / Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C D803 MS Accelerated Hardener D808 - Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D841 MS Hardener

D807 Thinner Over 25°C D861 MS Hardener

D812 Slow thinner

For exceptional conditions of Temperature and humidity (above 35°C or 70% RH) the use of D869 Very Slow thinner is recommended.

Application viscosity 15 seconds DIN4 with NS hardeners 17 - 18 seconds DIN4 with MS hardeners Spraygun Size 1.4 - 1.8 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 1 light coat followed by 2 full coats with NS hardeners 1 medium coat followed by 1 full coat with MS hardeners Drying Times Dust Free - 20 minutes with NS hardeners, 30 minutes with MS hardeners Through dry at 20°C - 20 hours

Through dry at 60°C - 30 minutes


DELTRON DG ACCELERATED SYSTEMS

MIXING RATIOS Mixing Ratios with Standard Hardener: By Volume DG 2 vol D863 1 vol

Thinner 1 vol

Mixing Ratios with MS Hardener: By Volume

DG 3 vol D864 1 vol

Thinner 1 vol

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Choose Thinner according to application temperature: Temperature Thinner 5°C - 18°C D808 18°C - 25°C D807 The recommended use at low temperatures is as follows: 8°C - 10°C Use Accelerated hardeners + D818 Accelerator 10°C - 15°C Use Accelerated hardener 15°C - 20°C Use D818 Accelerator D818 Accelerator can either

- be added to the ready for use paint in the proportion of 12ml or 12 mg or 2 capsful per litre of paint. OR - be used to prepare an "accelerated thinner" by adding 125 ml of D818 in 5L of Deltron thinner.

DRYING TIMES (ACCELERATED SYSTEMS)

Tape Free Hours

Stoving Times

POTLIFE (Hours)

DUST FREE (Minutes) 10°c 15°c 20°c 50°c 60°c

D863 3 - 4 10 7 6 5 30 min 20 min

D864 5 15 8 25 min

D818 + Standard hardener 5 15 8 25 min

D818 + MS hardener (D803) 4 5 8 30 min

D863 + D818 3 - 4 5 6 5 4 25 min 15 min

D864 + D818 6 20 min

For higher build, use 0.5 vol thinner.


Global at a Glance DG GRS Deltron DG Accelerated System

Mixing by volume

With NS Hardener - 2:1:0.5 or 2:1:1 With MS Hardener - 3:1:0.5 or 3:1:1 Pot Life at 20°C 2 - 3 hours with Accelerated hardeners+ D818. Pot Life at 20°C 3 - 4 hours with Accelerated hardeners. Pot Life at 20°C 4 - 5 hours with D818 in standard hardener. Hardener / Thinner Selection

Thinner 5 - 18°C D808 - Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D807 Thinner Hardener 8 - 10°C Accelerated hardener + D818 10 - 15°C Accelerated hardener 15 - 20°C Standard Hardeners + D818 Application viscosity: 15 seconds DIN4 with NS hardeners 17 - 18 seconds DIN4 with MS hardeners Spraygun Size 1.4 - 1.8 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 1 light coat followed by 2 full coats with NS hardeners 1 medium coat followed by 1 full coat with MS hardeners Drying Times

Dust Free 20°C – 5-10 minutes with Accelerated hardener + D818 10-15 minutes Accelerated hardeners D863/D864 15 minutes with Standard hardeners + D818 Through Dry 20°C 20 hours Through Dry 50°C 30 minutes with Accelerated hardeners D863/D864 25 minutes with Standard hardeners + D818 Through Dry 60°C 15 minutes with D863+D818 20 minutes with D864+D818 20 minutes with D863, 25minutes with D864 25 -30 minutes with Standard hardeners + D818


MATT, SATIN AND TEXTURED FINISHES PAINTING OF FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish with Deltron Direct Gloss, it is necessary to include matt, flex or texture additives in the mix. Additives are also required when applying DG over a flexible substrate (typically plastics). The additives required and the appropriate volume and weight mix ratios are indicated in microfiches if relevant or in the tables below.

Note : RIGID substrates include all metals, fibreglass and GRP FLEXIBLE substrates are all plastic types except GRP

Substrate Appearance DG D759 D843 D844 D814 D819 MS Hardener

Deltron Thinner

RIGID Gloss 3 vol - - - - - 1 vol 1 vol

Satin 3 vol 1.5 vol - - - - 1.5 vol 1 vol

Matt 3 vol 3 vol - - - - 1.5 vol 2 vol

Matt Textured 3 vol - 3 vol - - - 1.5 vol 2 vol

Leather Grain 3 vol - - 1.5 vol - - 1.5 vol 1 vol

FLEXIBLE Gloss 3 vol - - - 1 vol 2 vol

Satin 4 vol 2 vol - - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 0.5 vol

Matt 4 vol 4 vol - - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 1.5 vol

Matt Textured 4 vol - 4 vol - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 1.5 vol

Leather Grain 4 vol - - 2 vol - 2 vol 3.5 vol 0.5 vol

POLISHING Low bake or IR force drying: Minimum 1 hour after cooling

Air drying at 20°C: Minimum 20 hours after application

EQUIPMENT CLEANING After use, clean all equipment thoroughly with cleaning solvent or thinner.


HEALTH AND SAFETY

These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at; http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS

PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480

http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS�

These products are for professional use only RLD02

Page 1 of 5


June 2011

Product Information GRS Deltron BC

PRODUCTS Deltron Basecoat Tinters D7xx, D9xx

Deltron Xirallic® Special Effect Tinters PRLXx Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869 Deltron BC Fade-out Thinner D851 Deltron MS Hardener D841

For matt, satin and textured finishes Deltron Texture Additive D843 to create a fine textured ‘suede’ effect Deltron Leather Grain Additive D844 to create a coarser, more pronounced textured finish

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Deltron BC system consists of high opacity solid, metallic and mica colours. Used in conjunction with a recommended PPG repair system, Deltron BC meets or exceeds warranty requirements. As part of the Deltron Global Refinish System, Deltron BC carries a large number of approvals.


Substrate Preparation

PPG 2K primers P600 - P800 (wet) / P400 - P500 (dry) Electropaint P600 - P800 (wet) / P400 - P500 (dry) Sound 2K finishes P600 - P800 (wet) / P400 - P500 (dry) TPA Must be sealed (e.g. D834) Before and after any sanding operation, the substrate must be thoroughly degreased. For appropriate cleaners & cleaning processes, see Technical Data Sheet Deltron Cleaners RLD63.

Basecoat colour


Page 2 of 5

MIXING RATIOS Mixing Ratios for Deltron BC:

By Volume Deltron BC * 1 vol Thinner ** 1 vol * See ‘Performance and Limitations’ for use with D841 MS Hardener ** Choose thinner according to application temperature

THINNER SELECTION Temperature BC Metallic / Mica Colour BC Solid Colour Up to 18°C D808 D808

18°C - 25°C D808 D807 25°C – 35oC D807 D812 Above 35°C D812 D869

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS

Potlife: No limit Spray viscosity at 20°C: 15 seconds DIN4

APPLICATION, FLASH-OFF AND DRYING Spraygun set-up: 1.4 - 1.6 mm

Number of coats: 2 (or until hiding is achieved) Control Coat (Apply a control coat for metallic and micas)

Flash-off at 20°C:

- between coats

- before clearcoat

10 minutes

15 minutes Taping time: 15 minutes Total dry film build: 10 - 25 µm Theoretical coverage: 3.5 - 7 m²/l

Assuming 100% transfer efficiency and dry film thickness as indicated:


Page 3 of 5

REPAIR AND RECOATING

Sanding: If necessary, de-nib Deltron BC, after 20 minutes flash-off, using fine sand paper (P1200 - P1500) followed by a touch-up repair (see section on Fade-Out Technique) prior to the clearcoat application.

Overcoat / Re-coat time at 20°C:

- Minimum 15 minutes

- Maximum 24 hours

After 24 hours 1 Coat of Deltron BC has to be applied prior to clearcoat application.

Overcoat with: Deltron Clearcoats

FADE-OUT TECHNIQUE Fading out Deltron BC is necessary for spot repair and advisable when metallic or mica colours have to be repaired. Use D851 BC Fade-out Thinner as follows :

- Prepare Deltron BC colour as specified in this data sheet - Using light inward strokes, achieve coverage on the repaired area - Thin 1 part of the ready-for-use Deltron BC with 1 part D851 Deltron Fade-out Thinner - Use this mixture to fade the repair edges spraying from the outside to the inside of the repair

area - Repeat the last step until the potential colour difference has been lost - Allow 20 minutes flash-off before clearcoating

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS For optimum durability and adhesion BC may be mixed 10:1 with D841 MS Hardener, and then thinned 1:1 with GRS Thinner prior to application. Potlife of the activated basecoat is in excess of 48 hours. Application and drying properties are unchanged.



Page 4 of 5

Global at a Glance BC GRS Deltron Basecoat Topcoat Mixing by volume

With Thinner - 1 : 1 Pot Life at 20°C Unlimited Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C D808 - Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D808 - Solid Colour

D807 - Metallic / Mica Colour Over 25°C D807 - Solid Colour D812 - Metallic / Mica Colour


Application viscosity 15 seconds DIN4 with NS hardeners Spraygun Size 1.4 - 1.6 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 2 full coats with 10 minute flash off between coats. For Metallic / Mica colours a final control coat is recommended Drying Times 15 minutes at 20°C before the application of Clearcoat 15 minutes at 20°C before taping Overcoating GRS Deltron Basecoat colours can be overcoated with any PPG 2K Clearcoat.


Page 5 of 5

HEALTH & SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480 Copyright © 2011 PPG Industries, all rights reserved

http://www.ppgrefinish.com/�

GLOBAL REFINISH

SYSTEM

October 2008

Product Information Deltron D894 PRODUCTS Deltron HS Clear D894 Deltron HS Hardeners D897, D8208 Deltron MS Hardener D803, D841, D861, D864 Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869 Deltron DG Fadeout Thinner D868 Deltron Accelerator D818

For matt, satin and textured finishes or painting of flexible substrates: Deltron Matting Base D759 to create a matt or satin appearance Deltron Plasticiser D814 to plasticise finishes over a flexible substrate Deltron Matt Flexibiliser D819 to create a matt or satin appearance over a flexible substrate Deltron Texture Additive D843 to create a fine textured ‘suede’ effect Deltron Leather Grain Additive D844 to create a coarser, more pronounced textured finish

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deltron High Solids Clear is a 2K acrylic urethane clearcoat. It is designed for use on original finishes with clearcoat over a single or multistage colour basecoat system.

Deltron High Solids Clear is designed for use over Deltron BC or Envirobase colour. The performance of Deltron High Solids Clear in a recommended PPG system meets or exceeds warranty requirements.

Deltron High Solids Clear offers: - savings in materials consumption and process time compared to conventional clearcoats; - low ready-for-use VOC content.

High Solids Clear

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Deltron D894 Clear must be applied on top of a clean and dust free Deltron Basecoat or Envirobase. The use of a tack rag is recommended to remove dust from the Basecoat or Envirobase film.

MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratios with MS Hardeners

By Volume D894 2 parts MS Hardener 1 part Thinner 1 part

2. Mixing Ratios with HS Hardeners: D897 / D8208*

By Volume D894 4 parts HS Hardener* 1 part Thinner* 0,5 parts *Choose Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature and system

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Temperature MS Hardener Thinner HS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D803 D808 D8208 D808 18°C - 25°C D841 D807 D897 D807 Over 25°C D861 D812** D897 D812** ** For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) the use of Very Slow Thinner D869 is recommended

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 3.5 - 4 hours Spray viscosity at 20°C: 16 - 19 seconds DIN4

APPLICATION AND FLASH OFF Spraygun set-up: 1.3 - 1.6 mm

MS System

1 medium coat ↓

10 min flash-off ↓

1 full coat ↓

5 - 10 min flash-off ↓

Low-bake / IR / airdry

HS System 1 mist coat

↓ no flash-off

↓ 1 full coat

↓ no flash-off

↓ Low-bake / IR / airdry

DRYING TIMES

Drying times: ***

- Dust free at 20 °C

- Through dry at 20 °C

- Through dry at 70°C

- Through dry at IR Medium

30 - 40 minutes

Overnight

30 minutes

10 minutes (dependent on colour of basecoat – darker colours require less time)

*** Stoving times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the stoving schedule to allow metal to reach recommended temperature.

Drying times may be reduced still further by adding 10ml or 10gms of D818 Accelerator per litre of ready to spray clear.

Total dry film build: 50 - 60 µm Theoretical coverage: 7 m²/L



Sanding: Essential before recoating to ensure good adhesion P800 (wet) P400 - P500 (dry)

Overcoat / recoat time:

- Force dry 60°C, 70°C or IR

- Airdry at 20°C

After cooling

Minimum 12 hours Overcoat with: PPG 2K Primers, Envirobase, Deltron GRS Topcoats

MATT, SATIN AND TEXTURED FINISHES PAINTING OF FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish with Deltron D894 HS clear, it is necessary to include matt, flex or texture additives in the mix. Additives are also required when applying D894 over a flexible substrate (typically plastics). The additives required and the appropriate volume and weight mix ratios are indicated in microfiches if relevant or in the tables below.

Note : Do not use HS hardeners for matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish.

Substrate Appearance D894 D759 D843 D844 D814 D819 MS Hardeners

Thinner

RIGID Satin 381g 672g - - - - 775g 950g

Matt 238g 601g - - - - 730g 950g

Matt Textured 229g - 578g - - - 661g 941g

Leather Grain 347g - - 606g - - 700g 939g

FLEXIBLE Satin 293g 517g - - - 677g 836g 971g

Matt 224g 509g - - - 632g 753g 960g

Matt Textured 191g - 482g - - 586g 689g 952g

Leather Grain 272g - - 476g - 625g 772g 960g

SPOT REPAIR PROCEDURE - Apply Deltron D894 HS Clear according to the 'Application, Flash-Off and Drying' section above.

- Leave to flash-off for 10 minutes/20°C after the 2nd coat.

- A suitable quantity of activated and thinned D894 HS Clear should then be reduced with Deltron DG Fade-Out Thinner D868 at a ratio of 1:3 (1 part activated and thinned Clear to 3 parts D868).

- Apply this 1:3 mix over the repair area, using a reduced gun pressure to minimize overspray. Spray from the outside of the repair inwards, covering an area that extends beyond the edge of the initial application.

- If necessary, repeat the previous step using D868 neat.

- After force dry or IR, buff the repair edges.

POLISHING

Low bake or IR force drying:

Minimum 1 hour after cooling

Air drying at 20°C: Minimum 24 hours after application

These products are for professional use only. RLD100

5

Global at a Glance D894 GRS Deltron High Solids Clear

Mixing by volume

With MS Hardener 2:1:1 With HS Hardeners D897/ 8208 4:1:0,5 Pot Life at 20°C with MS hardener 3,5 -4 Hours Pot Life at 20°C with D 897 HS hardener 1 Hours Hardener / Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C D803 MS Hardener D808 Fast thinner D8208 HS hardener D808 Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D841 MS Hardener D807 Thinner D897 HS Hardener D807 Thinner Over 25°C D841 MS Hardener D812 Slow thinner D897 HS Hardener D812 Slow thinner


Application viscosity 16 - 19 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.3 - 1.6 mm fluid tip Number of Coats MS System - 1 medium coat, 5 minute flash off, followed by 1 full coat HS System - 1 light coat, immediately followed by 1 full coat Drying Times

10 minutes flash off before stoving for MS system, No flash off for HS system

Dust Free - 30 - 40 minutes Through dry at 20°C - 16 hours Through dry at 70°C - 30 minutes


6


HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS


Copyright ©2008 PPG Industries, all rights reserved


These products are for professional only RLD104 Page 1


May 2006

Product Information

DELTRON D821

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION D821 is a transparent-grey primer surfacer with excellent anti-chip and anti-corrosion properties. It is ideal for the repair and repainting of any panel surfaces, particularly those areas most susceptible to chip damage.

Tintable with Deltron DG colour, D821 may be applied directly to bare steel, suitably prepared aluminium and pretreated steel. It may be overcoated, with or without sanding, with any Deltron GRS topcoat and Envirobase. D821 may be air dried, IR cured or low baked .

D821 offers significant economies in stock and process time. A single stage application of D821 can replace a conventional two stage primer system. D821 gives the adhesion and anticorrosion performance of an epoxy or wash etch primer together with the film build and surface levelling of a 2K surfacer.


Substrate

Bare steel Galvanised steel Zintec Aluminium and alloys Electropaint Aged painted surfaces GRP, fibre-glass Polyester filler

Preparation

P80 - 120 (dry) P400 (dry) Fine sanding pad P280 - 320 (dry) P360 (dry) / P800 (wet) P400 - 500 (dry) /P280 - 320 (wet) P320 (dry) P240 (dry)

Before and after any sanding operation, the substrate must be thoroughly degreased. Use an appropriate substrate cleaner/degreaser. PPG make a range of cleaning & degreasing products. See Technical Datasheet Deltron Cleaners, RLD63 for suitable cleaners & degreasers.

High Solids Chip Resistant Primer


MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratio – Untinted:

By Volume By Volume D821 5 vol D821 3 vol D884/D897 1 vol D841/D86 1 vol Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol

2. Mixing Ratio – Tinted:

By Volume By Volume D821 3 vol D821 3 vol UHS 1 vol DG 1 vol D884/D897 1 vol D841/D861 1.5 vol Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION

Temperature MS Hardener HS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D841 D884/D897 D808 Fast Thinner 18 - 25°C D841 D884/D897 D866 or D807 2K Primer Thinner 25 - 35°C D861 D884/D897 D812

Slow Thinner Over 35°C D861 D884/D897 D869 Very slow thinner

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 3 - 4 hours Spray Viscosity at 20°C: 18 - 25 seconds DIN4


APPLICATION AND FLASHOFF Untinted Tinted

Spraygun set-up:

1.4 - 1.6 mm

Number of coats: 2 - 3

Flash-off at 20°C: - Between coats

- Before topcoating

10 - 15 minutes

solventborne topcoat: 30 minutes waterborne topcoat: 45 minutes

DRYING TIMES

Drying times at 20°C:

- Dustfree

- Touch dry

- Through dry

Through dry at 60°C:*

35 minutes

1.5 - 2 hours

Overnight

20 -25 minutes

35 minutes

2 - 2.5 hours

Overnight

30 minutes

Through dry IR medium 10 -15 minutes 10 - 15 minutes

* Stoving times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the stoving schedule to allow metal to reach recommended temperature

Total dry film build: 70 - 110 µm 60 - 90 µm Theoretical coverage: assuming 100% transfer efficiency and dry film thickness as

indicated: 5 - 6 m²/l 6 - 7 m²/l


Sanding: Essential before recoating to ensure good adhesion P800 (wet) P400 (dry)

Overcoat with: Deltron GRS topcoats, Envirobase


Global at a Glance D821 DELTRON HS CHIP RESISTANT PRIMER D821

Mixing by volume

Untinted with HS Hardener - 5 : 1 : 1 D821:D884/897:thinner Tinted with HS Hardener - 3 : 1 : 1 : 1 D821:UHS:D884/897:thinner Untinted with MS Hardener - 3 : 1 : 1 D821:D841/861:thinner Tinted with MS Hardener - 3 : 1 : 1.5 : 1 D821:DG:D841/861:thinner

Pot Life at 20°C 3 - 4 hours Hardener / Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C D841 MS Fast Hardener or D884/897 HS Hardener D808 Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D841 MS Medium Hardener or D884/897 HS Hardener D807 Thinner - or D866 Primer Thinner Over 25°C D861 MS Slow Hardener or D884/897 HS Hardener D812 Slow thinner


Application viscosities 18 - 25 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Sizes 1.4 - 1.6 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 2 - 3 Drying Times Dust Free - 35 minutes Through dry at 20°C - Overnight or 30 minutes before topcoat Through dry at 60°C - 25 - 30 minutes


PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS

Use only the hardeners and thinners recommended on this data sheet. Do NOT use Hardeners D803, D864 or D8208, Accelerator D818, Enhancer D885.

Where humidity is in the range 70 - 80%, use of D869 Deltron Very Slow Thinner is recommended.


HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480


These products are for professional use only RLD10V Page 1


August 2008

Product Information UNIVERSEL D831

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Universel is a beige, two component, pigmented chromate-free etch.

It is designed to give good adhesion when used on new panels and to promote the adhesion of subsequent paint films.

Universel may be used in a wet-on-wet system if required and may be overcoated with most types of PPG 2K Primers.

This product must always be catalysed with its own Reactive Thinners. When used with D856, 2+1 wash filler is a high build chromate-free etch primer. Do not use it as an isolator


Substrate

Bare steel Galvanised steel Zintec Aluminium and alloys Electropaint Aged painted surfaces GRP , Fiber-Glass Polyester filler

Preparation

P80 – 120 (dry) P400 (dry) Scotchbrite P280-320(dry) P360 (dry)/P800 (wet) P400 - 500 (dry)/P280 - 320 (wet) P320 (dry) P80 - P120 (dry)

Degrease all surfaces to be painted with appropriate PPG substrate cleaner before and after sanding operation. See Technical Data Sheet Deltron Cleaners RLD63V.

Wash Primer D831 Reactive Thinner D832 Slow Reactive Thinner D833 2+1 Reactive Thinner D856 Primer Thinner D866


MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratios with Adhesion Promoter:

By Volume OR By Volume for Normal use small rub through areas**

D831 1 vol D831 1 vol

D832* 1 vol D832* 1 vol D866 0.2 vols

2. Mixing Ratios with High Build Primer:

By Volume D831 2 vol D856 1 vol D866 0.5 vol

*For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) and for large areas use Slow Reactive Thinner D833 ** This option may be used where a very smooth film is required on small rub through areas.

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 24 hours Performance of Universel will reduce 24 hours after it has been mixed

Spray viscosity at 20°C: Adhesion Promoter 16 seconds DIN4 (before any D866 addition) High Build Primer 25 seconds DIN4

APPLICATION AND FLASHOFF Spraygun set-up: 1.6 - 1.8 mm

Number of coats: 2 minimum - 3 maximum

Flash-off between coats at 20°C:

5 minutes


DRYING TIMES

- Dust free

- Dry to sand at 20°C


Adhesion Promoter

5 minutes

30 - 45 minutes (D832)

30 - 45 minutes (D833)

High Build Primer

75 - 90 minutes

Total dry film build: 15 - 20 µm 40 - 50 µm Theoretical coverage: Assuming 100% transfer efficiency and dry film

thickness as indicated:

8m²/l 5m²/l


Sanding: Adhesion Promoter

P600 - P800 (wet) P400 (dry)

High Build Primer

P400 (wet) P320 (dry)

Overcoat / Re-coat time

(At 20°C)

- Air drying at 20°C 20 - 30 minutes 75 - 90 minutes

Overcoat with: PPG 2K primers


Global at a Glance D831 UNIVERSEL D831

Mixing by volume

With D832 or D833 - 1 : 1 With D832 or D833 and D866 – 1 : 1 : 0.2 for rub through areas With D856 and D866 - 2 : 1 : 0.5

Pot Life at 20°C - 24 hours maximum.

For exceptional conditions of Temperature and humidity (above 35°C or 70% RH) and for large areas, the use of D833 Slow Reactive thinner is recommended.

Application viscosities

16 seconds DIN4 - with D832 / D833 (before any D866 addition) 25 seconds DIN4 - with D856 Spraygun Sizes 1.6 - 1.8 mm Fluid Tip Number of Coats 2 minimum, 3 maximum Drying Times Dust Free 5 minutes Through dry at 20°C - 30 - 45 minutes using D832 / D833, 75 - 90 minutes using D856



Universel is an adhesion promoter; do not use it as an isolator.

Low builds, excessive thicknesses or approximate mixing ratio will reduce performance of the product.


VOC INFOMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.c) in ready to use form is max. 780g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 780g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.





August 2006

Product Information ENVIROBASE Envirobase Waterborne Basecoat colour T4xx Envirobase Thinner T494 Envirobase Slow Thinner T495

PRODUCTS Envirobase is waterborne basecoat colour for use in the repair of basecoat clear systems.

Applied as a part of a two-stage or multi-stage basecoat paint system, mixed Envirobase colour reproduces original solid, metallic or mica paint finishes.

Envirobase is a waterborne product, containing considerably less volatile organic compound (VOC) than conventional solventborne basecoat. This makes Envirobase particularly suitable for use in areas where VOC emissions or product VOC content are subject to legal restriction.

ENVIROBASE EXPRESS This is the system to use where high productivity is required. It incorporates accelerated, warm air movement over the surface of the paint film during the flash off periods.

The system raises the booth temperature to between 40 - 45oC during the Envirobase flash-off period, thereby reducing humidity by about 50%. This process / system has a different application process to the normal Envirobase application.

By using the Envirobase Express system, application & drying times can be dramatically reduced, giving quicker process times.


PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Apply over original stoved 2K finishes or PPG GRS Deltron primers except: D836 / D838 Koba, D831 Universel, D855 2+1.

Degrease all surfaces to be painted with appropriate PPG substrate cleaner before wet sanding with P800 grade paper or dry sanding with P500 grade paper.

Wash off residues and dry thoroughly before re-cleaning with appropriate PPG substrate cleaner. See Technical Data Sheet Deltron Cleaners RLD63V. The use of a tack-rag is recommended.

PRE-APPLICATION Hand-shake bottles of Envirobase tinter for a few seconds before use.

Mixed Envirobase colour should be thoroughly hand-stirred before application. If not used immediately it should be hand-stirred again before use.

Use nylon paint filters specially designed for use with waterborne paint materials. A 135 micron mesh is recommended, 190 microns maximum.

THINNER SELECTION Temperature Thinner Below 35°C T494 – Envirobase Thinner Above 35°C T495 – Envirobase Slow Thinner

MIXING RATIOS Mixing Ratios with Envirobase Colour

By Volume

Envirobase Colour 100 Vol Thinner T494/T495 10 – 30 Vol

Note: If the 10 parts Vol thinner addition is used, then it is very important to strictly observe the flash off times between coats and before the application of clearcoat. Spray viscosity Viscosity will vary with thinner level chosen, but optimum optimum application viscosity is 22 – 26 seconds DIN4 at 20°C Potlife: 3 months. Stir well before use


ENVIROBASE STANDARD PROCESS APPLICATION, FLASH-OFF AND DRYING

Small Surfaces Large Surfaces

Spraygun set-up: 1.2 - 1.3 mm

Number of coats: 3 - 4 light coats 2 - 3 medium coats

Control coat For flake colours, apply a light control coat onto dry film for even flake appearance. For optimum flake laydown, apply control coat at 1.2 - 1.5 bar inlet pressure.

Flash-off at 20ºC 60% relative humidity:

Use an airblower until the surface is touch dry

- between coats 1 - 2 minutes 3 - 4 minutes - before clearcoat Minimum 15 minutes

Total dry film build: 10 - 20 µm

ENVIROBASE EXPRESS PROCESS APPLICATION, FLASH-OFF AND DRYING


Number of coats: Wet-On-Wet 1 light coat, 2-3 medium coats

Flash off: Use the Envirobase Express Blowing and Heating for 6 - 7 minutes.

- Control coat For flake colours, apply a light control coat onto dry film for even flake appearance. For optimum flake laydown, apply control coat at 1.2 - 1.5 bar inlet pressure.

- Before clearcoat: Minimum 10 minutes Total dry film build: 10 - 20 µm


REPAIR AND RECOATING Overcoating: Envirobase must be overcoated with a GRS Deltron clearcoat

after the minimum flash times.

Recoat time: After 24 hours, 1 coat of Envirobase has to be applied prior to the clearcoat application. The maximum recoat time is 48 hours.

De-nib: It is possible to de-nib Envirobase, after 20 minutes flash off, with fine sanding paper – P1200/P1500 (dry) using air blowing and a tack rag to remove sanding dust and followed by a spot repair (see FADING-OUT section) prior to the clearcoat application.

Overcoat with: A wide range of Deltron Clearcoats.

(See Clearcoat Technical Data Sheets for information)

FADE-OUT TECHNIQUE Fading-out Envirobase is necessary for spot repair and advised when metallic or mica colours have to be repaired. Use T490 as follows : - Prepare Envirobase colour as specified in the datasheet. - Using light inward strokes reach coverage on the repaired area. - Thin one part of the ready for use Envirobase with one part of T490 ready to use - Use this mixture to fade the repair edges spraying from the outside to the inside the repair area. - Repeat the last step until the potential colour difference has been lost. - Allow the repair a 15 minutes flash off before clearcoating

EQUIPMENT CLEANING

Clean all mixing equipment immediately after use, preferably using a dedicated waterborne equipment cleaning machine.

Use tap water, with a final rinse using deionised water or an alcohol-based cleaner such as D846.

Ensure all equipment is completely dry before storage or use.


Global at a Glance Envirobase Envirobase Waterborne Basecoat Topcoat Envirobase Express Process

Mixing by volume

With Thinner T494 100 Vols : 10 - 30 Vols Pot Life at 20°C 3 months. Stir well before use. Thinner Selection

Below 35°C T494

Above 35°C T495 Application viscosity 18 - 22 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.2 - 1.3 mm fluid tip Number of Coats Standard Process 3 - 4 Light coats or 2 - 3 medium coats. A control coat is recommended for flake colours Express Process 1 Light coat plus 2-3 medium coats wet-on-wet. A control coat is recommended for flake colours Drying Times Standard Process: Use an air blower until surface is touch dry. Minimum - 15 minutes at 20°C before the application of Clearcoat Maximum 48 hours at 20°C before application of Clearcoat 15 - 20 minutes at 20°C before taping

Express Process: Use an Envirobase Express system for drying Minimum - 10 minutes at 20°C before the application of Clearcoat Maximum 48 hours at 20°C before application of Clearcoat 15 - 20 minutes at 20°C before taping Overcoating Envirobase Basecoat colours can be overcoated with a wide range of


PPG Clearcoats. See Clearcoat Data Sheet for details.

PERFORMANCE & LIMITATIONS

DO NOT use the spraygun as an airblower STORAGE & HANDLING

Envirobase tinters, Envirobase mixed colour & T494 thinner should be stored in a cool, dry place away from sources of heat. During storage and transportation temperatures must be maintained at a minimum of +5°C and a maximum of +35°C. Avoid exposure to frost or freezing conditions.

Envirobase should be mixed in clean, dry containers and equipment. Do not use mixing vessels or spray equipment that contains solvent residues. Mixing vessels should ideally be plastic - if metallic they should have an internal anti-corrosion coating.

WASTE HANDLING & DISPOSAL / HEALTH & SAFETY

These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS Store waterborne & solventborne wastes separately. All wastes must be handled by a competent agent with appropriate certification. Waste must not be disposed of into drains or watercourses.



These products are for professional use only. RLD153 Page 1


November 2008

Product Information HARLEQUIN

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Harlequin Basecoat colours contain unique multi-layer pigment flakes that give a paint film the ability to literally change colour when viewed from different angles. Each colour exhibits a wide range of hues depending on the angle at which it is viewed and the angle of incidence of the light. The standard colour names above reflect the colour seen at approximately 90o and 45o respectively. These colours are totally compatible with the PPG Global Refinish System range of products, and can be used as the G.R.S. Basecoats.


Degrease all surfaces to be painted with appropriate PPG substrate cleaner. Apply Harlequin over properly prepared surfaces. A 2K primer is strongly recommended. This should be carefully sanded, finishing with 500 grade paper (dry) or P1000 (wet). The surface should then be very thoroughly cleaned prior to the application of colour. Wash off residues and dry thoroughly before re-cleaning with appropriate PPG substrate cleaner. See Technical Data Sheet Deltron Cleaners RLD63. The use of a tack-rag is recommended.

Basecoat Colour DH987 Cyan to Purple DH991 Magenta to Gold DH988 Silver to Green DH993 Purple to Orange DH989 Green to Purple DH994 Gold to Silver DH990 Blue to Red DH995 Red to Gold


MIXING RATIO Note: Settling may occur in shipping. Hand stir thoroughly before the addition of thinner. Mixing ratio with BC Colour By Volume

BC Colour 1 Vol Thinner* 1 Vol

APPLICATION GUIDE *Note: Hand stir thoroughly for 2 minutes after thinning.

Tri-coat Mixing – Harlequin colours can be “let down” and used as a mid-coat colour

With D895. In doing so you can achieve more transparency when using a groundcoat such as Black, White etc. D895 can be used in any quantity necessary to achieve your desired effect. (Example: 100 parts D895 : 1 part Harlequin colour). D841 hardener must be used in both the groundcoat and the midcoat at a ratio of

5% by volume to the thinned colour. • Use the appropriate thinner depending upon application temperature.

Standard mix: No limit (stir well before using) Potlife: Tri-coat mix: When using D841 - the pot life is 1 hour. Spray gun set-up: 1.3mm - 1.5mm fluid tip set spraygun up to manufacturers recommendations Number of coats: 2 - 3 or until hiding is achieved

Film build: 25 microns for optimum performance. If using as a Tri-coat, apply as many coats as needed to achieve desired colour.

Flash-off between coats: 5 - 10 minutes Drying times at 20oC: Before application of clear 15 minutes minimum 24 hours maximum

Clear: Any Global Refinish System Clear may be used.


Global at a Glance Harlequin BC GRS Deltron Basecoat Harelquin Colours

Mixing by volume

With Thinner - 1 : 1 With Hardener and Thinner - Add 5% Hardener to paint, and then add thinner 1 : 1 Pot Life at 20°C Unlimited, normal thinning 1 hour when used with Hardener Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C D808 - Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D807 - Thinner

Over 25°C D812 - Slow thinner


Application viscosity

15 seconds DIN4 with NS hardeners. Spraygun Size 1.3 - 1.5 mm fluid tip. Number of Coats 2 - 3 full coats or until hiding is achieved. Drying Times 15 minutes at 20°C before the application of Clearcoat 24 hours maximum before application of clearcoat. Over coating

GRS Deltron Basecoat colours can be over coated with any PPG 2K Clearcoat.

© 2008 PPG Industries. All rights reserved


NOTES 1. Custom or exotic finishes are excluded from coverage under the Global Paint Performance

Guarantee. 2. For additional information refer back to datasheet RLD02 - GRS Deltron Basecoat.






May 2006

Product Information GRS Deltron D800 Clear

PRODUCTS Deltron Clear D800 Deltron Medium Solids Hardeners D803, D841, D861 Deltron Accelerated Medium Solids Hardener D864 Deltron Standard Solids Hardener D802, Deltron Accelerated Standard Solids Hardener D863 Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869 Deltron DG Fade-out Thinner D868 Deltron Accelerator D818

For matt, satin and textured finishes or painting of flexible substrates: Deltron Matting Base D759 to create a matt or satin appearance Deltron Plasticiser D814 to plasticise finishes over a flexible substrate Deltron Matt Flexibiliser D819 to create a matt or satin appearance over a

flexible substrate. Deltron Texture Additive D843 to create a fine textured ‘suede’ effect Deltron Leather Grain Additive D844 to create a coarser, more pronounced textured finish

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deltron D800 is a high-performance two-pack acrylic urethane clearcoat designed for repair and re-spraying as part of a basecoat/clearcoat process.

The performance of Deltron D800 in a recommended PPG repair system meets or exceeds warranty requirements and the Deltron GRS system carries many OEM approvals. Deltron D800 can be accelerated to maintain fast curing at low temperature, or to speed up process time for small to medium repairs in normal temperature conditions. In order to accelerate the curing, Accelerated hardeners (D863 - D864) and / or D818 Accelerator can be used, separately or in combination. D863 / D864 hardeners are used as replacements for Standard or MS hardeners in the Clear mix. D818 Accelerator is an additive which is added to the Ready mixed paint or to the thinner.


PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Apply on top of a clean and dust free GRS Deltron basecoat (the use of a tack rag is recommended to remove dust from the basecoat film).

MIXING RATIOS 1. Mixing ratios with Standard System By Volume D800 2 vol D802 1 vol Thinner** 1 vol* 2. Mixing ratios with MS System By Volume D800 3 vol MS Hardener** 1 vol Thinner** 1 vol*

* For high build, use 0.5 vol.

** Choose MS Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature:

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Temperature MS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D803 Fast D808 18°C - 25°C D841 Medium D807 Over 25°C D861 Slow D812 For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) the use of Very Slow Thinner D869 is recommended.

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Standard System MS System Potlife at 20°C: 6 - 8 hours 6 hours Spray viscosity at 20°C: 15 seconds DIN4 17 - 18 seconds DIN4

SPRAYGUN SET UP 1.4 - 1.8 mm Fluid Tip - Pressure as per manufacturers recommendations


NUMBER OF COATS With NS Hardener, apply 1 light coat, followed by 2 full coats, to give a dry film thickness of 45 - 50 microns. With MS Hardener, apply 1 medium coat followed by 1 full coat, to give a dry film thickness of 55 - 60 microns.

FLASH OFF AT 20°C 5 minutes between each coat. 10 minutes before stoving / baking.

DRYING TIMES** Dust Free at 20°C 20 minutes with NS Hardener, 30 minutes with MS Hardener Through dry at 20°C 20 hours with either NS or MS Hardener. Through dry at 60°C* 30 minutes with either NS or MS Hardener Infra Red Drying 10 - 15 minutes, depending upon colour. * Stoving times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the stoving schedule, to allow metal to reach recommended temperature. **Drying times may be further reduced by using the GRS Deltron accelerated systems. Substitute D863 for D802 and dust free time is 10 minutes, Stoving at 60°C takes 20 minutes. Adding 10gs or 10 mls of D818 Accelerator per litre of ready to spray paint mixture reduces dust free times to - 15 minutes with D802, or 5 minutes with D803. Using D863 and D818 together reduces dust free times to 5 minutes and through drying to 15 minutes at 60°C. Pot Life is 3 - 4 hours.

OVERCOATING/RECOATING Overcoat / Recoat time - If Force dried, after cooling, or after Air drying at 20°C for 8 hours. It is essential to sand before recoating to ensure good adhesion. Sand with P800 (wet) or P400 (Dry). Overcoat with - Any PPG 2K primer, GRS Deltron topcoats, or Envirobase.


• Apply GRS Deltron D800 according to the details given above. • Leave to flash off for 10 minutes at 20°C after the second full coat. • A suitable qua ntity of activated and thinned D800 should be further reduced with GRS

Deltron DG Fade Out Thinner D868 at a ratio of 1:3 (1 part activated DG to 3 parts D868)

• Apply this 1:3 mix over the repair area, using a reduced gun pressure to minimise overspray; Spray from the outside of the repair inwards, covering an area that extends beyond the edge of the initial application.

• After force drying or IR buff the repair edges.


Global at a Glance D800 GRS Deltron Clear – Normal Speed Systems

Mixing by volume

With NS Hardener - 2:1:0.5 or 2:1:1 With MS Hardener - 3:1:0.5 or 3:1:1 Pot Life at 20°C 6 - 8 hours with D802, D803 or D841 Pot Life at 20°C 3 - 4 hours with D864, or D863 Hardener / Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C

D803 MS Accelerated Hardener D808 - Fast thinner


D807 Thinner Over 25°C D861 MS Hardener

D812 Slow thinner


Application viscosity 15 seconds DIN4 with NS hardeners 17 - 18 seconds DIN4 with MS hardeners Spraygun Size 1.4 - 1.8 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 1 light coat followed by 2 full coats with NS hardeners 1 medium coat followed by 1 full coat with MS hardeners Drying Times

Dust Free - 20 minutes with NS hardeners, 30 minutes with MS hardeners

Through dry at 20°C - 20 hours Through dry at 60°C - 30 minutes (Can be reduced by using Accelerated System)


Deltron D800 Clearcoat – Accelerated Systems

MIXING RATIOS

1.Mixing Ratios with Standard System Hardener: By Volume D800 2 vol Standard Hardener 1 vol Thinner* 1 vol* 2. Mixing Ratios with MS System: By Volume D800 3 vol MS hardener 1 vol Thinner* 1 vol*

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Choose Thinner according to application temperature: Temperature Thinner 5°C - 18°C D808 18°C - 25°C D807 The recommended product use at low temperatures is as follows: 8°C - 10°C Accelerated hardeners + D818 Accelerator 10°C - 15°C Accelerated hardener 15°C - 20°C D818 Accelerator D818 Accelerator can either

- be added to the ready for use paint in the proportion of 12ml or 12 mg or 2 capfuls per litre of paint.

- be used to prepare an "accelerated thinner" by adding 125 ml of D818 in 5L of Deltron thinner.

DRYING TIMES TAPE FREE time Stoving

POTLIFE DUST FREE time

10°c 15°c 20°c 50°c 60°c

D863 3 - 4 hours 10 min 7 hours 6 hours 5 hours 30 min 20 min

D864 5 hours 15 min 8 hours 25 min

D818 + Standard hardener

5 hours 15 min 8 hours 25 min

D818 + MS hardener(D803)

4 hours 5 min 8 hours 30 min

D863+ D818 3 - 4 hours 5 min 6 hours 5 hours 4 hours 25 min 15 min

*For higher build, use 0.5 vol thinner.


Global at a Glance D800 GRS Deltron Clear - Accelerated Systems

Mixing by volume

With NS Hardener - 2:1:0.5 or 2:1:1 With MS Hardener - 3:1:0.5 or 3:1:1 Pot Life at 20°C 3 - 4 hours with D863 Pot Life at 20°C 5 hours with D864 Hardener / Thinner Selection



D807 Thinner Over 25°C D861 MS Hardener D812 Slow thinner


Application viscosity 15 seconds DIN4 with NS hardeners 17 - 18 seconds DIN4 with MS hardeners Spraygun Size 1.4 - 1.8 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 1 light coat followed by 2 full coats with NS hardeners 1 medium coat followed by 1 full coat with MS hardeners Drying Times Dust Free - 12 minutes with NS hardeners 15 minutes with MS hardeners Through dry at 20°C - 5 hours Through dry at 60°C - 15 - 25 minutes


MATT, SATIN AND TEXTURED FINISHES PAINTING OF FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish with Deltron D800 Clear, it is necessary to include matt, flex or texture additives in the mix. Additives are also required when applying D800 over a flexible substrate (typically plastics). The additives required and the appropriate volume and weight mix ratios are indicated in microfiches if relevant or in the tables below.

Note : RIGID substrates include all metals, fibreglass and GRP FLEXIBLE substrates are all plastic types except GRP

Substrate Appearance D800 D759 D843 D844 D814 D819 MS hardener

Deltron Thinner

RIGID Gloss 3 vol - - - - - 1 vol 1 vol Satin 3 vol 1.5 vol - - - - 1.5 vol 1 vol Matt 3 vol 3 vol - - - - 1.5 vol 2 vol Matt Textured 3 vol - 3 vol - - - 1.5 vol 2 vol Leather Grain 3 vol - - 1.5 vol - - 1.5 vol 1 vol

FLEXIBLE Gloss 3 vol - - - 1 vol 2 vol Satin 4 vol 2 vol - - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 0.5 vol Matt 4 vol 4 vol - - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 1.5 vol Matt Textured 4 vol - 4 vol - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 1.5 vol Leather Grain 4 vol - - 2 vol - 2 vol 3.5 vol 0.5 vol

POLISHING Low bake or IR force drying: Minimum 1 hour after cooling Air drying at 20°C Minimum 20 hours after application





These products are for professional use only RLD165V

Page 1 of 4


January 2011

Product Information PLASTIC ADHESION PROMOTERS

PRODUCTS The PPG Plastic Painting System gives a range of products for the successful refinishing of all paintable plastic substrates*, from cleaning and preparation through to texturing and topcoating. D820 Plastic Adhesion Promoter is a fast, transparent 1 pack primer suitable for use on the vast majority if paintable plastic substrates and avoids the need to identify the plastic prior to spraying. D8420 Plastic Adhesion Promoter - Aerosol, is a fast, 1 pack primer in an aerosol. It is suitable for use on the vast majority of paintable plastic substrates avoiding the need to identify the substrate before spraying, and is designed for priming spot repairs or small components. D816 Flexible Adhesion Promoter for Plastics, is a ready for use, flexible, pigmented adhesion promoter for use over solvent sensitive substrates such as 1K PUR plastic. Thorough preparation and cleaning are essential for the successful refinishing of plastic parts. The PPG plastic cleaning and preparation system is designed to produce the best performance from the adhesion promoter, undercoat and topcoat systems. Refer to the Cleaning and Preparation of Plastic Substrates PDS RLD241V. * Note: These adhesion promoters are not suitable for use on Polystyrene (PS), or on pure PE, which is considered un-paintable.

D816 Flexible Adhesion Promoter for Plastics D820 Plastic Adhesion Promoter D8420 Plastic Adhesion Promoter - Aerosol


Page 2 of 4


If the plastic surface appears inconsistent, it is recommended that the part be "flamed" or pre-stoved for 30 minutes at 60°c.

Substrate Sand

GRP, Fibre glass P320 (dry) Other plastics (new part) Fine sanding pad Other plastics (light damage) P320 -P400 (dry) Polyester filler (A652) P400 (dry) Pinhole filler (A655) P400 (dry)

Prior and after any sanding operation, the substrate must be thoroughly degreased with Deltron D846.

Before the adhesion promoter application, D846 may be used sprayed on the panel and allowed to evaporate in order to avoid any static electricity effect.

MIXING RATIO D816 & D820 are supplied ready for use, no thinning required. Stir D816 thoroughly before use. D8420 is ready to spray from the aerosol. Shake to dislodge the ball bearing & then shake for 2 minutes prior to use.

APPLICATION, FLASH-OFF AND DRYING

D816

D820

Spraygun set-up: 1.3 - 1.6 mm 1.3 - 1.6 mm

D8420 - Shake the aerosol can to mix the contents thoroughly (approx 2 minutes), until the mixing pellets can be heard.

Number of coats: 2 1 - 2

Flash-off at 20°C: - Between coats 5 - 10 minutes n/a

- Before topcoating 60 minutes 30 minutes – D820 20 minutes – D8420

Total dry film build: 15 - 25 µm 3 - 7 µm


Sanding: Not necessary in normal use.

Overcoat with: Deltron topcoats* Envirobase*

* Failure to observe the recommended flash time before topcoat may result in adhesion failure.


Page 3 of 4

Global at a Glance D816/D820/D8420 PLASTIC ADHESION PROMOTERS Prior and after any sanding operation, the substrate must be thoroughly cleaned using D846 Antistatic Agent. If the plastic surface appears to be inconsistent, it is recommended that the part be "flamed" or pre - stoved at 60°C for 30 minutes. D816 and D820 are supplied "Ready for Use" so no mixing is required. D816 should be thoroughly stirred before use. D8420 is supplied in an aerosol - dislodge the ball bearing and shake for 2 minutes before use. D816 / D820 1.3 - 1.6 mm Fluid Tip D8420 is supplied in an aerosol - shake can thoroughly for 2 minutes After ball bearing is released. Number of coats D816 - 2 coats with 5 - 10 minutes flash off between coats. D820 : D8420 - 1 to 2 coats Flash off before topcoating / overcoating D816 - 40 minutes before topcoating / overcoating D820 - 30 minutes before topcoating / overcoating D8420 - 20 minutes before topcoating / overcoating Dry Film Thickness D816 15 - 25 microns D820 / D8420 3 - 7 microns


Page 4 of 4

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS It is necessary to shake the plastic adhesion promoter can a few seconds before use.

When higher build is necessary, D839 flexibilised or D8023 flexibilised (see relevant individual technical datasheet for details) may be used on top of the plastic adhesion promoters.

AEROSOL CAN DISPOSAL When aerosol is empty, turn it upside down and press the nozzle until all propellant is exhausted. Place empty can or cans that will no longer be used into properly labeled metal containers. The waste containers should be managed as a hazardous waste according to legislation.


VOC INFORMATION D8420 Aerosol The EU limit value for this product (product category: llB.e) in ready to use form is max. 840g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 840g/litre.

D816/D820 This product falls outside of the scope of EU Directive 2004/42 and therefore does not have a VOC product category classification. This product can be used by professional motor vehicle repairers.

HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com

PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480 Copyright © 2011 PPG Industries, all rights reserved


These products are for professional use only. RLD166V

Page 1


October 2006

Product Information DELTRON Anti-Silicone Additive

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Anti-silicone Additive D899 is an ancillary product specially formulated to help eliminating cratering problems due to silicone or grease contamination.

Application Guide

Add 15ml if D899 to 1l of ready-for-use Deltron topcoat. This product should be added after activation and before thinning, to ensure that the maximum VOC for the product in use is not exceeded. Thinner should then be added to the normal recommended level.


Do not use D899 in Primers, Deltron BC and Envirobase. Excessive quantities of D899 cause sagging of the topcoat.


Anti-Silicone Additive – D899


Page 2

VOC INFORMATION This product falls outside of the scope of EU Directive 2004/42 and therefore does not have a VOC product category classification. This product can be used by professional motor vehicle repairers. HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS

PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD,England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480



Page 1 of 7


December 2009

Product Information CERAMICLEARTM

DELTRON D8105 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PPG CeramiClearTM Deltron D8105 is a mar and scratch resistant high solids clearcoat.

PPG CeramiClearTM Deltron D8105 has excellent surface properties which, compared with conventional clearcoats, protect the finish against scratches & abrasion therefore preserving the glossy finish for a long time.

PPG CeramiClearTM Deltron D8105 is compatible with Envirobase Basecoat

PREPARATION OF SUBTRATES

ATTENTION! If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the OE CeramiClearTM thoroughly. Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems.

Before any preparation work, wash all surfaces to be painted with soap and water. Rinse and allow to dry before degreasing with a suitable PPG substrate cleaner: Ensure all substrates are thoroughly cleaned and dried before and after each stage of the preparation work. Always wipe substrate cleaner off the panel surface immediately, using a clean, dry cloth.

Please see Deltron Cleaners (RLD63V) Technical Data Sheet for appropriate substrate cleaning and degreasing products

High Solids Clearcoat


Page 2 of 7

BASECOAT DRY TIME Basecoat flash-of at 20ºC: Envirobase:20 - 30 minutes (use of hand held or freestanding air blower recommended)

MIXING RATIO By Vol D8105 2 vol D8215 1 vol

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Spray viscosity 16 - 18 seconds DIN4 at 20ºC: Potlife at 20°C: 1 hour

APPLICATION AND FLASH OFF Spraygun set-up (conventional): 1.3 – 1.4 mm fluid nozzle.

Flow knob open to 2.5 turns from fully shut Pressure at Gun: See spraygun manufactures recommendation. Number of coats: 1 light and continuous coat, 1 full Flash-off:

- Between coats 10 minutes - Before stoving 10 minutes

DRYING TIMES Through dry at 60ºC 30 minutes

TECHNICAL INFORMATION Dry Film Thickness 45 - 60 microns


Page 3 of 7

FADE OUT PROCESS Fade Out Thinner D8425 has been developed to allow a simple and easy fade-out of PPG Deltron CeramiClear D8105 on panels with OE CeramiClear finish. Follow the process below to achieve a successful repair.

Clean the OE finish thoroughly first to remove any water soluble dirt prior to commencing preparation work. Use an appropriate substrate cleaner/degreaser. PPG make a range of cleaning & degreasing products. See Technical Datasheet: Deltron Cleaners RLD63 for suitable cleaners & degreasers

Blending Area Basecoat Blending Area Clear - Fade Out Area Sand the surface with an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3-5 mm) and with 3MTM

Hook-itTM 260L grade P800 - P1200; sand Edges and borders again with 3MTM Soft Pad Ultrafine. Moist sanding of the blending area with an Moist sanding of the Fade Out area with Eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3mm) 3MTM TrizactTM Finesse-ItTM fine sanding And 3MTM TrizactTM Finesse-ItTM fine disc P3000 and an eccentric sander Sanding disc P3000 supported by a (sanding stroke 3mm). The surface Preparation gel, e.g. Matt Gel or 3MTM must be 100% matt. Do not use Prep & Blend. Scotchbrite! The sanded Fade Out area must be sufficiently large. Clean & degrease surface again thoroughly. Apply CeramiClearTM As usual and fade out into the matted blending area. Do not apply the clearcoat on the unsanded surface. Mix the Ready- for - use D8105 CeramiClearTM approximately 1 : 3 with D8425 CeramiClearTM Fade Out Thinner. Apply the thinned CeramiClearTM in light coats over the fade out area, (always stay within the prepared area). Apply enough to give a smooth edge. Finish with Neat D8425 Fade' Out Thinner.


Page 4 of 7

Flash off time before baking - 10 minutes at 20°C. Bake for 30 - 35 minutes at 60°C (metal temperature), and allow to cool. After cooling, cure the fade out area for another 15 minutes (approx) with Infra Red (medium) at 100% power. Allow to cool for 20 - 30 minutes. If necessary, sand out any dirt in the fade out area, or remove any texture with 3MTM Trizact P3000 disc. Do not use any other abrasives.

Polish the fade out area with PPG Specialty Performance Products SPP1001 • always start the polishing process with the black SPP final

polishing pad. • use only a small amount of the polishing compound • Max; 1500 rpm • Always lead the polishing machine from the repair to the OE. • Always check the surface temperature (Do not allow to get hot)

REMOVAL OF DUST AND DIRT 3MTM TrizactTM Finesse-ItTM P3000 discs are recommended to sand out dust and / or dirt. Remove any sanding scratches with a 75mm 3MTM TrizactTM Finesse-ItTM

P3000 fine sanding disc (wet) and an eccentric sander (sanding stroke 3mm). Polish the repair area with PPG Specialty Performance Products SPP1001 Using the Orange SPP compounding foam pad (SPN1902) on a polishing machine at approx. 1500 rpm. To achieve a mirror gloss, finish the repair using the black SPP final polishing pad (SPN1903). Note: for more aggressive polishing, use the orange SPP compounding foam pad Use SPP Lambswool compounding pad (SPN1905) only in a difficult polishing situation. Following the recommended procedures ensure the original texture and scratch resistance remain at the highest possible level.


Page 5 of 7

BEST PRACTICES WITH UHS PRODUCTS

Paint storage conditions

Keep ready for use paint in good conditions to ensure correct viscosity. RFU temperature above a minimum of 15˚C, and ideally over 18˚C. This includes paint, hardeners and thinners.

Mixing and making ready for use

Activate accurately, and by weight where ever possible. Where mixing must be by volume, only use a round and parallel sided mixing container together with the correct mixing stick. If using a measuring container marked in percentages, you must be sure that the percentages give the correct quantities. Make sure that Hardener and Thinner is mixed in well. High solids or high viscosity products can take a little longer to mix in, so a good practice is to stir Hardener in first, then add thinner before stirring again. Use mixed product as quickly as possible. Choose the correct Hardener for the required bake cycle. Keep to the recommended levels of additives. Do not exceed the recommended level of additives such as Flexibilisers.

Application technique, process and equipment choices

Use correct spraygun set ups, and set up the spraygun correctly. Use a “Single Visit” application wherever possible, following the advice given in the application section. Check that the spraybooth is operating effectively. If necessary make an oven check to be sure that metal temperature is reached, especially on low down repair areas. PPG recommendations are based on time at metal temperature, so this should be allowed for in the bake cycle that is set for the job.


Page 6 of 7

Global at a Glance D8105 GRS Deltron CeramiClearTM

Mixing by volume

With HS Hardener - 2 : 1 Pot Life at 20°C 1 hour

Application viscosity 16 - 18 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.3 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 1 light but continuous coat, 10 minute flash off, followed by 1 full coat Drying Times Flash before bake: 10 minutes flash off before stoving. Through dry at 60°C - 30 minutes Dry Film build 45 - 60 microns


Page 7 of 7

VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.e) in ready to use form is max. 840g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 840g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.






May 2006

Product Information

2K GREYMATIC UHS PRIMA Fast Normal Solids System

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2K GreyMatic UHS Prima is a range of 2K primer surfacers suitable for a wide range of repair work. Versatile, quick-drying and easy to apply and sand, they offer excellent corrosion resistance, film build, surface leveling and gloss holdout over a wide range of substrates such as sound original paintwork, bare steel, polyester body fillers and suitable adhesion primers.

By simple adjustment of the thinning ratio, 2K GreyMatic UHS Prima may be applied as a primer surfacer, as a high build spray filler, or as a wet-on-wet surfacer. 2K GreyMatic UHS Prima may be air dried, low baked or IR cured.

It can be directly overcoated with Deltron GRS BC, Deltron GRS DG, Deltron GRS UHS, Deltron Progress UHS DG or Envirobase basecoat. By combining D8018, D8019 and D8024 (see GreyMatic section), a range of 4 grey shades can be obtained. By using the relevant grey shade (GreyMatic 1,3 ,5 or 7) as a tinted undercoat, the topcoat consumption and the total repair process time may be reduced.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE – DEGREASING


Please see Deltron Cleaners (RLD63) Technical Data Sheet for appropriate substrate cleaning and degreasing products.

D8018 White D8019 Black D8024 Grey


PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE - PRIMING & SANDING

Bare Steel should be lightly abraded and completely rust free before application. GreyMatic may be applied directly, but bare metal primers Universel or DP40 are recommended where optimum adhesion and corrosion resistance is required.

Other bare metals should be pre-primed with either Universel or DP40.

Electropaint should be sanded with P360 grade paper (dry) or P800 grade (wet).

Original Paintwork or Primers should be sanded using P280-P320 grade paper (dry) or P400-P500 grade paper (wet). Spot prime any exposed bare metal with bare metal primer Universel or DP40.

GRP or Fibre glass should be sanded using P320 grade paper (dry).

Polyester Fillers should be dry sanded using a sequence of grade of paper grades suitable for the chosen application of GreyMatic : P80-P120 when using as a spray filler. P80-P120-P240 when using as a primer surfacer or non-sand surfacer.

HARDENER & THINNER SELECTION

Using: NS Hardeners Temperature NS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D863 D808 18-25oC D802 D866/D807 25-35oC D802 D812 Above 35oC D802 D869 When using GreyMatics as a wet on wet primer, it is recommended that the same hardener or a slower option be used in subsequently applied direct gloss colour or clearcoat. Consult the appropriate technical datasheets(s) to identify a suitable common hardener.


MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratio for Spray Filler: By Volume UHS Prima 3 vol Hardener 1 vol Thinner Potlife at 20°C: 50-60min Spray viscosity 30-35 seconds DIN4/20°C

2. Mixing Ratios with Primer Surfacer: By Volume UHS Prima 3 vol Hardener 1 vol Thinner 0.5 vol Potlife at 20°C: 90 min Spray viscosity 17-20 sec DIN4/20°C

SPRAYGUN SETUP Applied as a Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Fluid Tip, Gravity: 1.6-1.8 mm 1.6-1.8mm Suction: 1.8-2.0mm 1.8 - 2.0mm Pressure: Follow spraygun manufacturer's recommendations


APPLICATION GUIDE Applied as a: Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Number of coats: max. 3 2-3 Flash off/20°C: - between coat 10 minutes 10 minutes - before stoving Do not force dry 10 minutes

DRYING TIMES Applied as a: Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Dust free/20oC 10 minutes 10 minutes Touch dry/20°C 1 hours 1 hours

Sandable/20°C Under 100 microns 4 hours 3 – 4 hours Above 100 microns 4.5 hours 4 – 4.5 hours Through dry/600C Do not Stove 25 minutes* Through dry/ IR medium Do not IR Dry 15 minutes * Drying time once substrate reaches 60°C metal temperature.

FILM PROPERTIES Applied as a: Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Dry film builds: - minimum 80µ 60µ - maximum 200µ 140µ


APPLICATION AS A WET ON WET SURFACER MIX RATIO Mixing Ratios using UHS Primer: By Volume UHS Prima 3 vol Hardener 1 vol Thinner 1 vol

Number of coats 1-2

Spray viscosity DIN4/20°C: 14 –15 sec Flash off between coats 10 minutes Flash off before BC, DG or 20-30 minutes UHS topcoat

Flash off before Envirobase topcoat 30 minutes Do not exceed 30 minute/20°C flash-off time before application of topcoat.

When using GreyMatic UHS Prima as a wet on wet surfacer, it is recommended that the same hardener or slower be used in subsequently applied direct gloss colour or clearcoat. Consult the appropriate technical datasheets(s) to identify a suitable common hardener.


Global at a Glance D8018/8019/8024 FAST GREYMATIC UHS PRIMA

Mixing by volume

With NS Hardeners: As Spray Filler 3 : 1

As Primer Surfacer 3 : 1 : 0.5 As a Wet on Wet 3 : 1 : 1 Pot Life at 20°C with NS hardener 50 - 60 minutes as Spray filler, 90 minutes as Primer Surfacer

Hardener / Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C D863 NS Accelerated hardener D808 Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D802 NS Hardener D807 Thinner - or D866 Primer Thinner Over 25°C D802 NS Hardener

D812 Slow thinner


Application viscosities NS Hardener 50 - 60 seconds DIN4 - Spray Filler,

17 - 20 seconds DIN4 - Primer Surfacer, 14 - 15 seconds DIN4 - Wet on Wet

Spraygun Sizes 1.6 - 1.8 mm fluid tip Filler or Primer Surfacer 1.4 - 1.6 mm fluid tip Wet on Wet Number of Coats

Spray Filler 3 maximum, Primer Surfacer 2 - 3 Wet on Wet 1 - 2

Drying Times Dust Free - 10 minutes Through dry/20°C 3 - 4.5 hours (Filler / Primer surfacer mode) Time to topcoat 30 minutes (Wet on Wet mode) Dry Film Builds approx. 80-200 microns as Filler, approx. 60 - 140 microns as Surfacer


GREYMATIC SELECTION GreyMatic shades are selected according to topcoat colour. The recommended GreyMatic shade for any colour can be referenced in the PPG colour information systems. As a guide, see below.

G1 G3 G5 G7 D8018 D8018 70% D8024 D8019 D8024 30% (Mix by Wt.)

After selecting the correct GreyMatic shade for the topcoat colour, the primer shades are made by reference to the chart above. GreyMatic 1, 5 and 7 are available straight from the can. GreyMatic 3 is a blend of D8018/D8024 as indicated above. Mix with hardener & thinner as indicated in this TDS before application.

LIMITATIONS

Accelerators should NOT be used. Part used cans of hardener must be carefully closed immediately after use. All equipment must be perfectly dry. Use of UHS Prima is not recommended when humidity levels exceed 80%.

SPOT PRIMING

When spot priming in spray filler mode, it may be beneficial to add additional thinner (up to 1 part) to the last coat to achieve a smooth repair edge.

Use under: Whites Light Greys Light Yellows Light Greens Light blues

Use under: Medium greys Yellows

Use under: Dark greys Dark Yellows Greens Blues Light and medium reds

Use under: Blacks Dark greens Dark blues Dark reds

G1 G3 G5 G7


FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES: Mixing Ratio using UHS Prima: By Volume UHS Prima 3 vol Hardener 1.5 vol D814 1 vol Number of coats 1-2 Spray viscosity DIN4/20°C: 16 - 20 sec Flash-off between coats 10 minutes




Page 1 of 5


February 2010

Product Information P.E. SPRAY

POLYESTER SPRAY FILLER – A712

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION P.E. Spray is a light grey 2-component polyester spray filler. It is designed for the repair of large surfaces with extensive defects and irregularities - where use of conventional knifing stoppers would be inconvenient and time-consuming.

Quick drying, easy to apply and with high film build, P.E. Spray may be used over a variety of substrate materials. Once sanded, it may be overcoated with any primer or surfacer before application of topcoat.


In all cases, select the appropriate PPG cleaner(s) from the guide below, and ensure that the substrate is thoroughly cleaned and dried both before and after preparation work.

Bare Steel (including Shotblast Steel) should be abraded with P80-P120 grit discs and be completely rust free before application. D845 DX310 High Strength Degreaser is recommended for cleaning bare steel. P.E. Spray may be applied directly, although corrosion resistance is optimised if DP40 Chromate-free 2K Epoxy Surfacer (D834/D835) is applied first.

Other Bare Metals (e.g. Aluminium and Galvanised Steel) and Fibreglass must be pre-primed with DP40 (see above).

Original Paintwork should be sanded using P280 grade paper (dry) or P360 grade paper (wet). Spot prime any exposed bare metal with DP40 (see above).

Polyester Fillers should be dry sanded with P80-P120 grit discs in order to prevent adhesion problems.

Hardener SHA307

Thinner A714


Page 2 of 5

GUIDE TO SELECTION OF SUBSTRATE CLEANERS Ensure all substrates are thoroughly cleaned and dried before and after each stage of the preparation work. Always wipe substrate cleaner off the panel surface immediately, using a clean, dry cloth.

Please see Deltron Cleaners (RLD63V) Technical Data Sheet for appropriate substrate cleaning and degreasing products.

MIXING RATIOS By Weight A712 100 SHA307 2 A714 4 – 8

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 1 hour

APPLICATION AND FLASH OFF Spraygun set-up: Gravity 2.0 - 2.5mm Suction Not Recommended Spray pressure 2 - 3 bar

Number of coats: 3 – 4, (4 maximum) Flash off: between coats 5 - 10 minutes before stoving 10 minutes


Page 3 of 5

DRYING TIMES

IR drying times: Short-wave

10 minutes

Medium Wave

Dry sandable at 60°C Dust free at 20°C Dry sandable at 20°C (200 microns)

15 minutes

30 minutes 20 minutes

2-3 hours

Total dry film build: Minimum

150µ

Maximum 600µ Theoretical coverage: 2-3m²/lt

Sanding: Grade dry

P180 followed by P320

Grade wet Do not wet sand

Overcoat with: Any PPG 2K Primer -

Please refer to ‘Performance and Limitations’ section overleaf


Page 4 of 5

Global at a Glance A712 POLYESTER SPRAY FILLER A712

Mixing by volume

100 A712 : 2 SHA307 : 5-10 A714 Mixing by weight 100g A712 : 2g SHA307 : 4 - 8g A714

Pot Life at 20°C - 1 hour

Spraygun and Sizes Gravity Gun with 2.0 - 2.5 mm Fluid Tip Number of Coats 2 minimum, 4 maximum Drying Times Dust Free 20 minutes Through dry at 20°C 2 - 3 hours (200 microns film build) Through dry at 60°C 30 minutes Dry Film Thickness: 150 - 600 microns


Page 5 of 5


Do not apply P.E. Spray over phenolic-based primers (e.g. Universel, 2+1).

All cans of A712 should be thoroughly hand-stirred before use.

Avoid stirring unactivated A712 with mixing sticks contaminated with residues of material containing SHA307 hardener.

Mix only the quantity of product required for immediate use. Do not return activated material to the original container. Carefully re-seal part-used containers of A712 and SHA307.

P.E. Spray is water-sensitive and must not be wet-sanded.

P.E. Spray must not be overcoated directly with topcoat finishes. Always apply a sealer coat of a suitable 2K primer or surfacer before application of topcoat.

Immediately after use, thoroughly clean all spray and mixing equipment with cleaning solvent or thinner.

The use of HVLP spray equipment can give an increase in transfer efficiency of around 10% depending upon the make and model of equipment used.

HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480 Copyright © 2009 PPG Industries, all rights reserved




May 2006

Product Information GRS Deltron D8120

PRODUCTS Deltron Clear D8120 Deltron Medium Solids Hardeners D803, D841, D861, D864 Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869 Deltron DG Fade-out Thinner D868 Deltron Accelerator D818 For matt, satin and textured finishes or painting of flexible substrates: Deltron Matting Base D759 to create a matt or satin appearance Deltron Plasticiser D814 to plasticise finishes over a flexible substrate Deltron Matt Flexibiliser D819 to create a matt or satin appearance over a flexible substrate Deltron Texture Additive D843 to create a fine textured ‘suede’ effect Deltron Leather Grain Additive D844 to create a coarser, more pronounced textured finish

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Deltron D8120 Clear must be applied on top of a clean and dust-free Deltron basecoat or Envirobase. The use of a tack rag is recommended.

Deltron D8120 High Solids Clear is a premium quality high solids polyurethane clearcoat specifically formulated to give optimum gloss and durability when low-baked.

It is designed to be used over Deltron BC and Envirobase Colour.

High-solids Clear


MIXING RATIO Mixing ratios with MS Hardener:

By Volume D8120 3 vol MS Hardener* 1 vol Thinner 0.8 vol (20%)

*Choose MS Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION

Temperature MS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D803 Fast D808 18°C - 25°C D841 Medium D807 Over 25°C D861 Slow D812 For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) the use of Very Slow Thinner D869 is recommended

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 2 hours Spray viscosity at 20°C: 16 -17 seconds DIN4

APPLICATION AND FLASHOFF

Spraygun set-up: 1.4 - 1.6 mm Number of coats: 1 medium , 1 full

Flash-off at 20°C:

- Between coats 5 minutes

- Before stoving 10 minutes


DRYING TIMES

Drying times*:

- Dust free at 20 °C 40 minutes

- Dry to handle at 20°C 6 hours

- Through dry at 20 °C 20 hours

- Through dry at 60°C 30 - 40 minutes (D841)

- Through dry at 70°C 30 minutes


Dependent on colour of basecoat (darker colours require less time):

15 minutes

* Stoving times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the stoving schedule to allow metal to reach recommended temperature.

Drying times may be reduced still further by using the Deltron Accelerated

System. Total dry film build: 50 - 60 µm Theoretical coverage: assuming 100% transfer efficiency and dry film thickness as

indicated: 7 - 7.5 m²/l


Sanding: Essential before recoating to ensure good adhesion

- Grade wet P800

- Grade dry P400



after cooling

- Airdrying at 20°C Minimum 12 hours Overcoat with: Deltron primers Envirobase Deltron topcoats


MATT, SATIN AND TEXTURED FINISHES / PAINTING OF FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish with Deltron D8120 Clear, it is necessary to include suitable matt, flex or texture additives in the mix. Additives are also required when applying D8120 over a flexible substrate (typically plastics). The additives required and the appropriate volume and weight mix ratios are indicated in microfiches if relevant or in the tables below.

Note : RIGID substrates include all metals, fibreglass & GRP FLEXIBLE substrates are all plastic types except GRP Substrate Appearance D8120 D759 D843 D844 D814 D819 MS

hardener Deltron Thinner

RIGID Gloss 3 vol - - - - - 1 vol 0.8 vol

Satin 3 vol 1.5 vol - - - - 1.5 vol 0.8 vol

Matt 3 vol 3 vol - - - - 1.5 vol 1 vol

Matt Textured 3 vol - 3 vol - - - 1.5 vol 1 vol

Leather Grain 3 vol - - 1.5 vol - - 1.5 vol 0.8 vol

FLEXIBLE Gloss 3 vol - - - 1 vol 2 vol 0.8 vol

Satin 4 vol 2 vol - - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 0.8 vol

Matt 4 vol 4 vol - - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 1 vol

Matt Textured 4 vol - 4 vol - - 2 vol 3.5 vol 1 vol

Leather Grain 4 vol - - 2 vol - 2 vol 3.5 vol 0.8 vol

SPOT REPAIR PROCEDURE - Apply Deltron D8120 HS Clear according to the 'Application, Flash-Off and Drying' section above. - Leave to flash-off for 10 minutes / 20°C after the 2nd coat.

- A suitable quantity of activated and thinned D8120 HS Clear should then be reduced with Deltron DG Fade-Out Thinner D868 at a ratio of 1:3 (1 part activated and thinned clear to 3 parts D868).

- Apply this 1:3 mix over the repair area, using a reduced gun pressure to minimise overspray. Spray from the outside of the repair inwards, covering an area that extends beyond the edge of the initial application.

- After force-dry or IR, buff the repair edges.

POLISHING

Low-bake or IR force-drying:


Airdrying at 20°C: Minimum 24 hours after application




Mixing by volume

With MS Hardener - 3:1:0.8 (20%) Pot Life at 20°C 3 hours Hardener / Thinner Selection





Application viscosity 16 - 17 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.4 - 1.6 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 1 medium coat, 5 minute flash off, followed by 1 full coat Drying Times 10 minutes flash off before stoving Dust Free - 40 minutes Through dry at 20°C - 20 hours Through dry at 60°C - 30 minutes


Page 1 of 5


February 2010

Product Information FILLERS

PRODUCTS Galvaplast 77 - Multi Purpose Polyester Filler A656 Multi Purpose Stopper A722 Iviplast 66 - Flexible Polyester Putty A652 P.E. Stopper - Standard Polyester Stopper A661 Extra Light - Light Polyester Filler A659 Pinhole Filler A655 Putty V.B.A. Beige - Acrylic Stopper Beige A242

Hardener for A656, A722 A652, A661 & A659 SHA305

PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS Galvaplast 77 is a premium quality 2 component polyester filler that offers outstanding adhesion to any metal substrate - including 'difficult' surfaces such as galvanised or zinc-coated steel, stainless, aluminium and fibreglass. Offering smooth application, fast drying and easy sanding, Galvaplast 77 is particularly versatile and easy to use. Multi Purpose Stopper is a quality stopper that offers outstanding adhesion to a wide variety of metallic substrates, including galvanised or zinc coated steel, properly prepared aluminium and fiberglass. This Stopper has outstanding ease of application and sanding properties.

Iviplast 66 is a fine, flexible 2 component polyester filler that offers excellent adhesion to both rigid and deformable plastics. Like the substrates it is designed to repair, Iviplast 66 offers good resistance to the light impacts and stonechips that frequently damage the lower external bodywork and trim areas.

P.E. Stopper is a conventional 2 component polyester filler that offers quick drying and easy clog-free sanding. P.E. Stopper is suitable for use over bare steel, fibreglass, GRP and other primed or painted surfaces.

Extra Light is a low density 2 component polyester filler that is exceptionally easily applied and worked, even over major surface imperfections. Smooth and consistent, and offering good flexibility and impact resistance, Extra Light may be used over bare steel, painted surfaces, fibreglass and GRP.

Pinhole Filler is a very light single-component filler. It is suitable for minor filling work on rough or irregular surfaces over which a smooth, high-gloss paint finish is required. Pinhole Filler is ideal for moulded surfaces, especially plastics.

Putty V.B.A. Beige is a light single-component acrylic stopper, suitable for the quick repair of minor surface scratches or imperfections. V.B.A. Putty can be used over paintwork, primer or filler, and is ideal for the quick repair of minor preparation defects.

GALVAPLAST 77 - A656 MULTI PURPOSE STOPPER - A722

IVIPLAST 66 - A652 P.E. STOPPER - A661 EXTRA LIGHT - A659

PINHOLE FILLER - A655 PUTTY V.B.A. BEIGE - A242


Page 2 of 5

SURFACE PREPARATION The matrix indicates those surfaces which may be directly overcoated by each PPG Filler, and where appropriate the abrasive grade with which the surface should be dry-sanded before application.

Galvaplast 77

A656

Multi Purpose Stopper

A722

Iviplast 66

A652

P.E. Stopper

A661

Extra Light

A659

Pinhole Filler

A655

Putty VBA Beige

A242

Paintwork Yes P360

Yes P360

No Yes P360

Yes P360

Yes scotchbrite

Yes P360

Bare Steel & Cast Iron

Yes P80-120

Yes P80-120

No Yes P80-120

Yes P80-120

No Yes P80-120

Galvanised Steel

Yes scotchbrite

Yes scotchbrite

No see note (1)

below

see note (1)

below

No No

Aluminium Yes P120-240

Yes P120-240

No see note (1)

below

see note (1)

below

No No

Fibreglass & GRP

Yes P360

Yes P360

No Yes P360

Yes P360

Yes scotchbrite

Yes P360

Plastics No No Yes scotchbrite

No No Yes scotchbrite

No

Polyester Fillers

- - - - No Yes P80

Note (1). These fillers may not be applied directly to the metal surface, but may be used once the substrate has been painted with a suitable adhesion primer (e.g. DP40 Chromate-Free 2K Epoxy Surfacer - D834/D835). Do not use phenolic-based adhesion primers.

SUBSTRATE CLEANING In all cases, select the appropriate PPG cleaner(s) and ensure that the substrate is thoroughly cleaned and dried both before and after preparation work. PPG make a comprehensive range of cleaning & degreasing products. See Technical Datasheet Deltron Cleaners RLD63V.


Page 3 of 5

APPLICATION GUIDE

A656/A722

Iviplast 66

A652

P.E. Stopper

A661

Extra Light

A659

Pinhole Filler

A655

Putty VBA Beige

A242

Hardener Selection:

SHA305

Supplied ready-for-use from the can

Addition of Hardener: at 5 - 10°C at 10 - 20°C at 20 - 30°C

2.5-3.0% 2.0-2.5% 1.5-2.0% by weight

2.5-3.0% 2.0-2.5% 1.5-2.0% by weight

3.0% 2.0% 1.0%

by weight

2.5-3.0% 2.0-2.5% 1.5-2.0% by weight

n/a

n/a

Mixing:

Thoroughly mix the hardener into the filler until the mix becomes an homogenous paste.

no mixing required

Potlife : at 5 - 10°C at 10 - 20°C at 20 - 30°C

8-12min 7-10min 5-10min

8-12min 7-10min 5-10min

8-10min 6- 9min 5- 9min

8-12min 7-10min 5-10min

n/a

n/a

Application :

Use a suitable knife or spreader see note (2) below

see note (3) below

Note (2). A655 Pinhole Filler should be applied with a clean cloth, using circular movements to fill small surface defects. After wiping off surplus filler, a second layer should then be applied and left to airdry for 15min at 20°C. Any remaining excess of product should then be removed before tacking off and applying a suitable plastics primer.

Note (3). A242 Putty V.B.A. Beige is best applied in several thin layers, leaving a flash-off interval between each of 5-10min at 20°C. Application should be by use of a suitable knife or spreader. Putty V.B.A. Beige may be sanded and recoated after 30-60min-airdrying dependant upon ambient temperature and film build.


Page 4 of 5

DRYING

A656/A722 (Minutes)

Iviplast 66

A652 (Minutes)

P.E. Stopper

A661 (Minutes)

Extra Light

A659 (Minutes)

Pinhole Filler

A655 (Minutes)

Putty VBA Beige

A242

Dry to sand at :

5 - 10°C 35-45 35-45 25-30 35-45 see above see above

10 - 20°C 30-40 30-40 20-25 30-40

20 - 30°C 20-30 20-30 15-20 20-30

IR medium wave 5-6 do not use 5-6 5-6 do not use do not use

IR short wave 4-5 do not use 4-5 4-5 do not use do not use

note : Before sanding 2-component polyester fillers (i.e. A656, A652, A661 or A659), it is useful to wipe the surface with Deltron Fast Thinner D808. This reduces surface tack and prevents excessive clogging of the sanding paper.

Dry sanding: paper grade

P80 followed by

P120 followed by

P240

P80 followed by

P120 followed by

P240

P80 followed by

P120 followed by

P240

P80 followed by

P120 followed by

P240

no sanding required

P220 followed by P400

OVERCOATING

A656/A722 (Minutes)

Iviplast 66

A652 (Minutes)

P.E. Stopper

A661 (Minutes)

Extra Light

A659 (Minutes)

Pinhole Filler

A655 (Minutes)

Putty VBA Beige

A242 (Minutes)

Overcoating time at 20°C:

30

60

40

40

15

10 - 20

Overcoat with: Any PPG 2K

Surfacer

Suitable PPG

Plastics Primer

Any PPG 2K Surfacer Suitable PPG

Plastics Primer

Any PPG Surfacer or

Topcoat


Page 5 of 5

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS Always follow the recommended mix ratio when adding hardener. Do not attempt to accelerate drying times by adding extra hardener, as this will cause major defects in the subsequent paint film, such as pinholing, peroxide bleaching and gloss dieback. Do not allow water to come into contact with 2 component polyester fillers - always dry sand. Even if the filler is subsequently dried by low-bake or Infra-Red lamps, wet sanding can still cause microblistering problems. Once hardener has been mixed into the filler, do not return it to the can. Be careful to prevent traces of hardener from the mixing stick or spreader from coming into contact with filler in the can. With the single exception of A242 Putty V.B.A. Beige, it is not recommended to overcoat these products directly with topcoat colour. Always overcoat first with a suitable primer surfacer such as D839 Prima or D836 Koba Plus (refer to specific product data sheets for full details of suitability and surface preparation.). Store product in a cool, dry environment. Do not expose to direct sunlight. After use, ensure that partly used containers are tightly sealed.

HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480 Copyright ©2010 PPG Industries, all rights reserved



Page 1

GLOBAL REFINISH

SYSTEM

October 2006

Product Information ADDITIVES

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

D818 Accelerator is an additive which accelerates the reaction of the paint component with its hardener. It is added to the mixed ready to spray product prior to application.

D886 Potlife Extender is an additive that prolongs mixed 2K product potlife, allowing ready-for-use product to remain at a sprayable viscosity for a longer time. D886 has no effect on spray application or through-drying time.

D885 Enhancer is a combination of an accelerator and a potlife extender. Using D885, topcoats will cure faster and extend the potlife.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE See individual technical datasheets.

APPLICATION GUIDE

D818 Deltron Accelerator

Mixing ratio:

D818 Accelerator may be used to create an accelerated thinner by adding:

(A) Deltron thinner * 5l (B) D818 250 ml * D808 or D807 This ‘accelerated thinner’ will be identified using the orange

sticker supplied with D818 and used as D808 or D807 according to the product mixing ratio.

D818 Deltron Accelerator D886 Deltron Potlife Extender D885 Deltron Enhancer


Page 2

PRODUCT SET-UP D886 Deltron Potlife Extender

D885 Deltron Enhancer

Mixing ratio: D886 Potlife Extender or D885 Enhancer are supplied as a 250ml part-fill of a 1l plastic bottle which has to be thinned with Deltron thinner as follows:

(A) D886/D885 250ml (B) Deltron thinner Up to 1l

- Open a new container of D886.

- Add Deltron thinner (D808, D807, D812, D869) until the level of liquid is 3cm below the rim.

- Reseal the container and mix the contents by shaking the can.

- Use the ‘special thinner’ obtained as a normal thinner according to product mixing ratio.


Do not use D818, D885 in Deltron 2K primers.

Do not use D818, D885, D886 in Deltron BC.

Excessive quantities of Accelerator D818 may reduce the gloss level of the dried paint film.


VOC INFORMATION This product falls outside of the scope of EU Directive 2004/42 and therefore does not have a VOC product category classification. This product can be used by professional motor vehicle repairers.




Page 1


May 2006

Product Information Deltron D843 Deltron D844

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION These additives are designed to be used with Deltron DG, UHS, Progress UHS and Deltron clears to produce the textured finish found as original equipment on some components. Texture Additive D843 provides a matt, suede effect while Leather Grain Additive D844 gives a more pronounced textured finish.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE See relevant technical datasheet for preparation of substrate

MIXING RATIOS

D843 TEXTURE FINISH D844 LEATHER FINISH

1. Mixing Ratios with Standard System: Standard DG/D800 2 vol DG/D800 2 vol System Standard Standard Hardener 1 vol Hardener 1 vol Thinner 2 vol Thinner 1 vol D843 2 vol D844 1 vol

2. Mixing Ratios with MS Hardeners

DG/D800 3 vol DG/D800 3 vol MS MS

Hardener 1 vol Hardener 1 vol Thinner 2 vol Thinner 1 vol

D843 3 vol D844 1.5 vol

3. For UHS & Deltron Progress UHS DG. Please see Relevant Technical Datasheet.

Texture Additive D843 Leather Grain Additive D844


Page 2

APPLICATION GUIDE D843 TEXTURE FINISH D844 - LEATHER FINISH

D880 D880 2 vol D880 3 vol MS MS Hardener 1 vol Hardener 1 vol Thinner 2 vol Thinner 1 vol D843 3 vol D844 1.5 vol D894 D894 2 vol D894 3 vol D884/D8208 1 vol D884/D8208 1 vol Thinner 2 vol Thinner 1 vol D843 3 vol D844 1.5 vol

D893 D880 2 vol D880 3 vol D884 1 vol D884 1 vol Thinner 2 vol Thinner 1 vol D843 3 vol D844 1.5 vol

Choose MS Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature:

Standard Hardener MS Hardener HS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D863 D803 Fast D8208 D808 18°C - 25°C D802 D841 Medium D884/D897 D807 Over 25°C D802 D861 Slow D884/D897 D812 For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) the use of Very Slow Thinner D869 is recommended.

APPLICATION, FLASH-OFF & DRYING

See individual Technical Datasheet

EQUIPMENT CLEANING

After use, clean all equipment thoroughly with cleaning solvent or thinner.


Page 3


HEALTH & SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480




July 2007

Product Information D759 Matting Base

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

Deltron Matting Base can be added to Deltron DG direct gloss colours to create a satin or matt appearance to match original finishes or to provide a custom finish.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Apply over original stoved finishes or recommended PPG primers after first wet flatting with P600 - P800 grade paper or dry sanding with P400 - P500.

SUBSTRATE CLEANING/DEGREASING Use an appropriate substrate cleaner/degreaser. PPG make a range of cleaning & degreasing products. See Technical Datasheet RLD63V for Cleaners & Degreasers.

D759 Matting Base


MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratios with Standard System: Matt Finish

DG 2 vols DG 2 vols Satin Finish

D802 1 vol D802 1 vol Thinner* 2 vols Thinner* 1 vol D759 2 vols D759 1 vol

2 Mixing Ratios with MS System:

Matt Finish DG 3 vols DG 3 vols

Satin Finish

MS Hardener* 1.5 vol MS Hardener* 1.5 vol Thinner* 2 vol Thinner* 1 vol D759 3 vols D759 1 vols * Choose MS Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature: HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Temperature MS Hardener Up to 18°C D803 Fast D808

Thinner

18°C - 25°C D841 Medium D807 Over 25°C D861 Slow D812 For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) the use of Very Slow Thinner D869 is recommended

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Standard System

MS System

Potlife 8 - 10 hours / 20°C 8 - 10 hours / 20°C Spray viscosity 15 secs DIN4 / 20°C 15 secs DIN4 / 20°C

SPRAYGUN SET UP Spraygun Tip 1.4 - 1.8 mm 1.4 - 1.8 mm Spray pressure See manufactures recommendations Number of coats 3 coats standard system 2 coats MS system

FLASH OFF AT 20°C Between coats 5 minutes 10 minutes Before stoving 10 minutes 10 minutes


DRYING TIMES/PROPERTIES Standard System

MS System

Dust free time 20 minutes 30 minutes Dry to handle 20°C 4 hours minimum 4 hours minimum Through dry - 20°C 12 hours 16 hours - 60°C 30 minute bake * 30 min bake * * Stoving times are for quoted metal temperature.

Additional time should be allowed in the stoving schedule to allow metal to reach recommended temperature.

IR drying Med Wave 15 minutes 15 minutes Recommended dry film build 45µm - 55µm 50µm - 60µm Theoretical coverage** 5 - 6 m² / L 6 - 7 m² / L ** Theoretical coverage in m2 per litre ready-to-spray, giving 50 µm dry film

thickness.

OVERCOATING/RECOATING As soon as the surface has cooled after stoving or after 16 hours drying at 20°C Overcoat with Any PPG 2K Primer or Deltron topcoat

Sanding Essential before recoating to ensure good adhesion - Grade Wet P800 P800 - Grade Dry P400 P400



May 2006

Product Information

2K GREYMATIC UHS PRIMA

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2K GreyMatic UHS Prima is a range of 2K primer surfacers suitable for a wide range of repair work. Versatile, quick-drying and easy to apply and sand, they offer excellent corrosion resistance, film build, surface leveling and gloss holdout over a wide range of substrates such as sound original paintwork, bare steel, polyester body fillers and suitable adhesion primers.

By simple adjustment of the thinning ratio, 2K GreyMatic UHS Prima may be applied as a primer surfacer, as a high build spray filler, or as a wet-on-wet surfacer. 2K GreyMatic UHS Prima may be air dried, low baked or IR cured.

It can be directly overcoated with Deltron GRS BC, Deltron GRS DG, Deltron GRS UHS, Deltron Progress UHS DG or Envirobase basecoat. By combining D8018, D8019 and D8024 (see GreyMatic section), a range of 4 grey shades can be obtained. By using the relevant grey shade (GreyMatic 1,3 ,5 or 7) as a tinted undercoat, the topcoat consumption and the total repair process time may be reduced.



Please see Deltron Cleaners (RLD63) Technical Data Sheet for appropriate substrate cleaning and degreasing products.

D8018 White D8019 Black D8024 Grey


PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE - PRIMING & SANDING

Bare Steel should be lightly abraded and completely rust free before application. GreyMatic may be applied directly, but Universel or DP40 bare metal primers are recommended where optimum adhesion and corrosion resistance is required.

Other bare metals should be pre-primed with either Universel or DP40.

Electropaint should be sanded with P360 grade paper (dry) or P800 grade (wet).

Original Paintwork or Primers should be sanded using P280-P320 grade paper (dry) or P400-P500 grade paper (wet). Spot prime any exposed bare metal with bare metal primer Universel or DP40.

GRP or Fibreglass should be sanded using P320 grade paper (dry).

Polyester Fillers should be dry sanded using a sequence of grade of paper grades suitable for the chosen application of D8023 : P80-P120 when using as a spray filler. P80-P120-P240 when using as a primer surfacer or non-sand surfacer.

HARDENER & THINNER SELECTION Using: HS Hardeners MS Hardeners Temperature HS Hardener Thinner MS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D8208 D808 D803/D864 D808 18-25oC D897 D866/D807 D841 D866/D807 25-35oC D897 D812 D861 D812 Above 35oC D897 D869 D861 D869 When using GreyMatics as a non-sand surfacer, it is recommended that the same hardener be used in subsequently applied direct gloss colour or clearcoat. Consult the appropriate technical datasheets(s) to identify a suitable common hardener.

MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratios using HS Hardeners:

Spray Filler Primer Surfacer UHS Prima 6 vol 6 vol Hardener 1 vol 1 vol Thinner 0 – 0.5 vol 1 vol

2. Mixing Ratios using MS Hardeners:

Spray Filler Primer Surfacer UHS Prima 4 vol 4 vol Hardener 1 vol 1 vol Thinner 0 – 0.5 vol 1 vol


MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Using: HS Hardeners MS Hardeners Applied as a: Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Potlife at 20°C: 30-40min 60min 30-60 min 75 min Spray viscosity DIN4/20°C: 40-85 sec 25-35 sec 25-60 sec 20-30 sec

SPRAYGUN SETUP

Using: HS Hardeners MS Hardeners

Applied as a: Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Spray Filler Primer Surfacer

Fluid Tip, 2.0-2.2mm 1.6-1.8mm 2.0-2.2mm 1.6-1.8mm Gravity:

Suction: not 1.8-2.0mm not 1.8-2.0mm

recommended recommended

Pressure: Follow spraygun manufacturer's recommendations

APPLICATION GUIDE

Using: HS Hardeners MS Hardeners Applied as a: Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Number of coats: max. 3 2-3 max. 3 2-3 Flash off/20°C: - between coats 10 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes - before stoving Do not 10 minutes Do not 10 minutes force dry force dry


DRYING TIMES


Applied as a: Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Dust free/20oC 10 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes 10 minutes Touch dry/20°C 3-4 hours 2-3 hours 3 hours 2 hours Sandable/20oC (below 100 microns) 5 hours 5 hours 5 hours 5 hours (above 100 microns) 6 hours 6 hours 6 hours 6 hours Through dry/600C Do not 30 minutes* Do not 30 minutes* force dry force dry Through dry/ Do not 20 minutes Do not 20 minutes IR medium force dry force dry

* Drying time once substrate reaches 60°C metal temperature.

FILM PROPERTIES


Applied as a: Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Spray Filler Primer Surfacer Dry film builds: - minimum 100µ 80µ 100µ 80µ - maximum 200µ 140µ 200µ 140µ

SANDING

By machine dry: P400

By hand wet: P800


TOPCOATING UHS Prima may be overcoated directly with the following topcoat products: Global Refinish System/Deltron BC Basecoat Colour Global Refinish System/Deltron DG Direct Gloss Colour Global Refinish System/Deltron UHS Ultra High Solids Direct Gloss Colour Global Refinish System/Deltron Progress UHS DG Colour Envirobase Waterborne Basecoat Colour

LIMITATIONS Accelerators should NOT be used. Part used cans of hardener must be carefully closed immediately after use. All equipment must be perfectly dry. Use of UHS Prima is not recommended when humidity levels exceed 80%.

FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES

Using: HS Hardeners MS Hardeners Mixing Ratio: UHS Prima 6 vol UHS Prima 4 vol Hardener 1 vol Hardener 1 vol D814 1 vol D814 1 vol Thinner 1 vol


GUIDE TO USING UHS PRIMA AS A WET ON WET SURFACER WITH HS HARDENERS

Mixing Ratios using HS Hardeners:

By Volume UHS Prima 6 vol Hardener 1 vol Thinner 1.5 - 2.5 vol Number of coats 1-2 Spray viscosity DIN4/20°C 18-25 sec. Flash off between coats @ 20°C 10 minutes Drying before Topcoat: Before BC, DG UHS or Progress UHS DG 20-30 minutes Before Envirobase Waterborne topcoat 30 minutes. WITH MS HARDENERS

Mixing Ratios using MS Hardeners: By Volume

UHS Prima 4 vol Hardener 1 vol Thinner 2 vol

Number of coats 1-2 Spray viscosity DIN4/20°C 14-16 sec. Flash off between coats @ 20°C 10 minutes Drying before Topcoat: Before BC, DG UHS or Progress UHS DG 20-30 minutes Before Envirobase Waterborne topcoat 30 minutes. Do not exceed the 30 minute/20°C flash off before topcoat application. When using GreyMatics as a wet on wet surfacer, it is recommended that the same hardener be used in subsequently applied direct gloss colour or clearcoat. Consult the appropriate technical datasheets(s) to identify a suitable common hardener.


Global at a Glance D8018/8019/8024 GREYMATIC UHS PRIMA

Mixing by volume

With HS Hardener - As Spray Filler 6 : 1 : 0 - 0.5 As Primer Surfacer 6 : 1 : 1 As a Wet on Wet 6 : 1 : 1.5 – 2.5 With MS Hardener - As Spray Filler 4 : 1 : 0 - 0.5 As Primer Surfacer 4 : 1 : 0.8 As a Wet on Wet 4 : 1 : 2 Pot Life at 20°C with HS hardener 30 - 40 minutes as Spray filler, 60 minutes as Primer Surfacer Pot Life at 20°C with MS hardener 30 - 60 minutes as Spray filler, 75 minutes as Primer Surfacer


Up to 18°C D8208 HS Fast hardener or D803 MS Fast Hardener D808 Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D897 HS Hardener or D841 MS Medium Hardener D807 Thinner - or D866 Primer Thinner . Over 25°C D897 HS Hardener or D861 MS Slow Hardener D812 Slow thinner

For exceptional conditions of Temperature and humidity (above 35°C or 70% RH) the use of D869 is recommended.

Application viscosities HS Hardener 40 - 85 seconds DIN4 - Spray Filler, 25 - 35 seconds DIN4 - Primer Surfacer, 18 - 25 seconds DIN4 – Wet on Wet MS Hardener 25 - 60 seconds DIN4 - Spray Filler, 20 - 30 seconds DIN4 - Primer Surfacer, 14 - 16 seconds DIN4 – Wet on Wet Spraygun Sizes 2.0 - 2.2 mm fluid tip - Spray Filler 1.6 - 1.8 mm fluid tip - Primer Surfacer 1.4 – 1.6 mm fluid tip – Wet on Wet Number of Coats Spray Filler 3 maximum Primer Surfacer 2 – 3, Wet on Wet 1 – 2 Drying Times Dust Free - 10 minutes Through dry at 20°C 3 - 4 hours as Spray Filler, 2 - 3 hours as Surfacer, To topcoat 30 minutes Wet on Wet. Dry Film Builds approx. 100-200 microns as Filler, approx. 80 - 140 microns as Surfacer


GREYMATIC SELECTION GreyMatic shades are selected according to topcoat colour. The recommended GreyMatic shade for any colour can be referenced in the PPG colour information systems. As a guide, see below.

G1 G3 G5 G7 D8018 D8018 70% D8024 D8019 D8024 30% (Mix by Wt.)

After selecting the correct GreyMatic shade for the topcoat colour, the primer shades are made by reference to the chart above. GreyMatic 1, 5 and 7 are available straight from the can. GreyMatic 3 is a blend of D8018/D8024 as indicated above. Mix with hardener & thinner as indicated in this TDS before application.


Use under: Whites Light Greys Light Yellows Light Greens Light blues

Use under: Medium greys Yellows

Use under: Dark greys Dark Yellows Greens Blues Light and medium reds

Use under: Blacks Dark greens Dark blues Dark reds

G1 G3 G5 G7



Page 1 of 7


December 2009

Product Information GRS Deltron D8122 CeramiClearTM 8122

CeramiClear 8122 Clear

PRODUCTS Deltron CeramiClear 8122 Clear D8122 Deltron HS Hardeners D897 / D8208 Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869, D8718, D8719 Deltron Catalyst Thinner D8714

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deltron CeramiClear 8122, is a 2K acrylic urethane Clearcoat, for the repair and repainting of original CeramiClear Clearcoat, over a single or multistage colour basecoat system. D8122 contains the CeramiClear technology that gives excellent scratch resistance. D8122 is designed for use over Envirobase Basecoat. Deltron CeramiClear 8122 has an organic solvent content lower than conventional clearcoats. This makes it particularly suitable for use in areas where VOC emissions or product VOC content is restricted and productivity is an issue.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Deltron D8122 CeramiClear 8122, must be applied on top of a clean and dust free basecoat. The use of a tack rag is recommended.

These products are for professional use only. RLD195V Page 2 of 7

MIXING RATIOS Mixing ratios with HS Hardeners D8122 3 (by volume) HS Hardener* 1 Thinner* 0.5

As with all ultra high solids products, cold ready for use paint temperatures can lead to more difficult application and overspray absorption. It is strongly recommended that ready for use product is applied at a temperature greater than 15°C

*HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Choose HS hardener and thinner according to application temperature:

Temperature HS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D8208 D808 18°C - 25°C D897 D807/D8718 Over 25°C D897 D812/D8719 For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (over 35°C / Over 70%RH) the use of D869 Very Slow thinner is recommended. Use HS Hardener D8208 / D808 for Spot Repairs. Pot Life at 20°C 1 hour with D897 hardener 30 min. with D897 hardener and D8714 Catalyst Thinner Application Viscosity 19 - 21 seconds / DIN4 / 20°C

APPLICATION AND FLASH OFF

Spraygun set-up: 1.3 - 1.6 mm Conventional Two Coat Process Application Apply 2 single coats to give 50-60 microns dry film

build. Flash off between spray coats 10 minutes Flash off before bake or IR dry 5 – 10 minutes Express Single Visit Process Application Apply 1 medium & 1 full coat to give 45-50 microns

dry film build. The first coat should be applied to all repair panels before the second coat is applied.

Flash off between spray coats For less than 3 panels, 2-3 minutes For more than 3 panels, no flash off is required.

Flash off before bake or IR dry 5 – 10 minutes


DRYING TIMES

Dust Free at 20°C 20 - 25 minutes Dry to handle at 20°C 6 hours Through dry at 20°C 24 hours Through dry at 60°C 30 - 40 minutes Through dry with IR (medium) 15 minutes ( IR drying is colour dependant) Stoving times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the stoving schedule to allow the metal to reach recommended temperature. Drying times may be reduced by using D8714 Catalyst Thinner together with D897 Hardener. Total Dry Film Thickness 50 - 60 microns Theoretical coverage 8 m²/l - Assuming 100% transfer efficiency

REPAIR AND RECOATING Sanding: Essential before recoating to ensure good adhesion - Grade wet P800 - Grade dry P400 Overcoating / Re-Coat time - After force drying / IR After Cooling - Air Drying at 20°C Minimum 12 hours Overcoat with: Deltron 2K primers, Envirobase, Deltron Topcoats

SPOT REPAIR PROCEDURES - Apply GRS Deltron D8122 CeramiClear according to the 'Application, Flash-Off and Drying'

section above.

- Take care to minimise the clearcoat edge in the fade-out area using spraygun technique.

- Melt overspray edge using D8730 Aerosol Fade-Out Thinner or D8429 Rapid Blender. - Refer to datasheet No: RLD199V for successful repair.

POLISHING Low Bake or IR drying Minimum 1 hour after cooling Air Drying at 20°C Minimum 12 hours after application


WEIGHT MIX TABLE FOR D8122 (using D808/D807/D812/D869 Thinners) GUIDELINES FOR WEIGHT MIXING Where a specific volume of clearcoat mix is required, this may be best achieved by weight mixing, using the guidelines below. The weights are cumulative - please do NOT tare the balance between additions.

Target Volume of RFU Paint

required (Litres)

Weight Clearcoat

D8122

Weight UHS Hardener D8208/D897

Weight Thinner

0.10 L 66 g 90 g 100 g

0.20 L 133 g 181 g 200 g 0.25 L

166 g 226 g 250 g

0.33 L

219 g 298 g 330 g 0.50 L

332 g 451 g 500 g

0.75 L

499 g 677 g 750 g 1.00 L

665 g 903 g 1000 g

1.50 L

997 g 1354 g 1500 g 2.00 L

1329 g 1805 g 2000 g

2.50 L

1662 g 2257 g 2500 g

WEIGHT MIX TABLE FOR D8122 (using D8718/D8719 Thinners) GUIDELINES FOR WEIGHT MIXING Where a specific volume of clearcoat mix is required, this may be best achieved by weight mixing, using the guidelines below. The weights are cumulative - please do NOT tare the balance between additions.


required (Litres)

Weight Clearcoat

D8122

Weight UHS Hardener D8208/D897

Weight Thinner

D8718/D8719

0.10 L 66 g 90 g 99 g

0.20 L 133 g 181 g 199 g 0.25 L

166 g 226 g 248 g

0.33 L

219 g 298 g 328 g 0.50 L

332 g 451 g 497 g

0.75 L

499 g 677 g 745 g 1.00 L

665 g 903 g 994 g

1.50 L

997 g 1354 g 1491 g 2.00 L

1329 g 1805 g 1988 g

2.50 L

1662 g 2257 g 2484 g


Global at a Glance D8122 GRS Deltron CeramiClear 8122 Mixing by volume With HS Hardener - 3:1:0.5 Pot Life at 20°C

1 hour with normal thinner and D897 hardener 30 min. with Catalyst Thinner D8714 and D897 Hardener Hardener / Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C D8208 HS Accelerated Hardener

D808 Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D897 HS Hardener D807/D8718 Thinner Over 25°C D897 HS Hardener D812/D8719 Slow thinner


Application viscosity 19 - 21 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.3 - 1.6 mm fluid tip Number of Coats Conventional - 1 medium coat, 10 minute flash off, followed by 1 full coat. Express - 1 light/medium coat followed by 1 full coat. Allow 2-3 mins flash between coats if painting less than 3 repair panels. Drying Times

10 minutes flash off before stoving or IR dry.

Dust Free - 20 - 25 minutes Through dry at 20°C - 24 hours Through dry at 60°C - 30-40 minutes


ACCELERATED THINNER SELECTION - Use of D8714 Catalyst Thinner D8714 Catalyst Thinner can be used for only in combination with D897 Hardener where rapid curing is required. Some reduction in final appearance may be noticed when using D8714 This combination should be used immediately after mixing.


VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category:11B.d) in ready to use form is max. 420g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 420g/litre Depending upon the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com




Page 1 of 3


May 2010

Product Information Universal Low Density Stopper Universal Low Density Stopper A664 Hardener for A664 SHA306 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

A664 Universal Low Density Stopper is an ultra lightweight, low density 2 component polyester filler that is exceptionally easily applied and worked, even over major surface imperfections. Smooth and consistent, and offering good flexibility, impact resistance and ease of sanding, Universal Low Density Stopper may be used over bare steel, painted surfaces, fibreglass and GRP.

SURFACE PREPARATION - SANDING The matrix indicates those surfaces which may be directly overcoated by each PPG Filler, and where appropriate the abrasive grade with which the surface should be dry-sanded before application. Paintwork Yes - P360 Bare Steel & Cast Iron Yes - P80-120

Galvanised Steel Yes - P80-120 Aluminium Yes - P80-120 Fibreglass & GRP Yes - P360 Plastics No Polyester Fillers -

SUBSTRATE CLEANING Before and after any sanding operation, the substrate must be thoroughly degreased. Use an appropriate substrate cleaner/degreaser. PPG make a range of cleaning & degreasing products. See Technical Datasheet Deltron Cleaners RLD63V for cleaners & degreasers.


Page 2 of 3

ADDITION OF HARDENER Universal Low Density Stopper A664 By weight At 5 - 10°C 2.5 - 3.0% At 10 - 20°C 2.0 - 2.5% At 20 - 30°C 1.5 - 2.0%

MIXING Thoroughly mix the hardener into the filler until the mix becomes an homogenous paste.

POTLIFE at 5 - 10°C 8-12 minutes at 10 - 20°C 7-10 minutes at 20 - 30°C 5-10 minutes

APPLICATION Use a suitable Putty knife or spreader

DRYING: Dry to sand at: 5 - 10°C 35-45 minutes 10 - 20°C 30-40 minutes 20 - 30°C 20-30 minutes IR medium wave 5 - 6 minutes IR short wave 4 - 5 minutes Dry sanding Paper Grade: P80 followed by P120 followed by P240

OVERCOATING Overcoating time at 20°C: 30min IR medium wave 5 - 6 minutes IR short wave 4 - 5 minutes Overcoat with: Any PPG 2K Surfacer


Page 3 of 3

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS Always follow the recommended mix ratio when adding hardener. Do not attempt to accelerate drying times by adding extra hardener, as this will cause major defects in the subsequent paint film, such as pinholing, peroxide bleaching and gloss dieback. Do not allow water to come into contact with 2 component polyester fillers - always dry sand. Even if the filler is subsequently dried by low-bake or Infra-Red lamps, wet sanding can still cause microblistering problems. Once hardener has been mixed into the filler, do not return it to the can. Be careful to prevent traces of hardener from the mixing stick or spreader from coming into contact with filler in the can. It is not recommended to overcoat these products directly with topcoat colour. Always overcoat first with a suitable 2K primer surfacer (refer to specific product data sheets for full details of suitability and surface preparation.). Store product in a cool, dry environment. Do not expose to direct sunlight. After use, ensure that partly used containers are tightly sealed.

VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.b) in ready to use form is max. 250g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 250g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.




Page 1

December 2006 (mod. 8.10.2008) TDS: RLD197V

Product Information

DELFLEET F3990/F3991/F3974

PRODUCT

Delfleet Chromate Free HS Epoxy White F3990

Delfleet Chromate Free HS Epoxy Grey F3991

Delfleet Chromate Free HS Epoxy Black F3974

Delfleet Epoxy Hardener F3296

Delfleet Epoxy Thinner F3342

Delfleet Slow Thinner F371

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Delfleet Chromated Free High Solids Epoxy Primer is a versatile product which complies to current European VOC legislation of less than 540 g/l. The primer is extremely versatile , is intended for use over a wide range of suitably prepared substrates and can be used as a sanding or a non-sand primer ; In non-sand mode it can be baked , air-dried or used as part of a wet-on-wet system.

SUBSTRATE PRE-TREATMENT

Prepare the substrate as follows: New hot / cold rolled steel / old steel Old steel Aluminium

SAND Shot Blast P180-240 Dry P240 dry or Scotchbrite -Not recommended over jointed aluminium sections. Please, seek advice from your local PPG representative

CLEANING

The substrate to be painted must be dry,clean,free of corrosion,grease & mould release agents. Substrates need to be thoroughly prepared using a combination of D845 Degreaser & D837 Spirit Wipe (or D8401 WB cleaner )

Zintec Galvanised Steel Sound paint finishes Electropaint GRP

P180-240 Dry P240-320 Dry P180-240 Dry P120-320 Dry P320-P400 Dry.

Delfleet Epoxy primers are not recommended for use over Etch primers or thermoplastic substrates.


Page 2

PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

Ensure thorough mixing of product prior to application

HVLP / Pressure By volume F3990/1/3974 4 F3296 1 Stir thoroughly before adding:- F372/F371/F3342 1.5

Airless / Airmix By volume

F3990/1/3974 4

F3296 1

Potlife at 20°C -: .4-6 Hours

Viscosity:

HVLP

18-22 sec. DIN4/20ºC

PRESSURE

18-22 sec.

DIN4/20ºC

AIRLESS / AIRMIX

71-85 sec. DIN4/20°C

Gun set-up:

1.4-1.8 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

1.0 -1.2 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

Fluid 380-420

cc/min

13-15 thou

( 0.33-0.37mm)

Airless-: approx 140 bar

Airmix-: approx 70 bar

Number of coats: 2 2 1-2

20ºC Flash off:

Between coats

Before bake

Before Recoat

10-15 mins.

15 -20 mins.

40 - 50 mins.

10-15 mins.

15 – 20 mins.

40 - 50 mins.

20-30 mins.

20 -30 mins.

60 mins.

Drying time:

20°C Dust free:

20°C Through dry

60ºC Bake

(metal temp.)

HVLP

15-25 mins.

Overnight

1 Hour

PRESSURE

15-25 mins.

Overnight

1 Hour

AIRLESS / AIRMIX

30-60 mins.

Overnight

1 Hour

Dry film

thickness:

Minimum Maximum Theoretical coverage:

50µm 75µm 8m2/l

50µm 75µm 8m2/l

75µm 100µm 5 m2/l

Theoretical coverage assuming 100% transfer efficiency at film builds indicated.

Flatting not necessary - If necessary P600-P800 or P320-P400

Overcoat with: Any Delfleet 2-pack topcoat system.


Page 3

GREYMATICS For each of the GreyMatic variants specified, the following mixing ratios apply:-

Note: Mixing ratios are expressed as weight percentages The mixture should then be activated and thinned in the normal way.

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS This product should not be used at a temperature lower than 10°C or a humidity higher than 80%.

Drying of this primer at temperatures below 15°C may be accelerated by adding 3% by weight of F384 Epoxy

Accelerator.

EQUIPMENT CLEANING After use clean all equipment thoroughly with cleaning solvent or thinner.

VOC INFORMATION

The EU limit for this product (product category:IIB.c) in ready for use form is max. 540g/l of VOC.

The VOC content of this product in ready for use form is max. 540 g/l. Depending on the chosen mode of

use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480

GreyMatic No. G1 G3 G5 G6 G7

F3990 100g 90g 0 0 0

F3991 0 10g 100g 70g 17g

F3974 0 0 0 30g 83g



Page 1 of 2


May 2011

Product Information GRS Deltron D8730, D8429 PRODUCTS GRS Deltron Aerosol Fade Out Thinner D8730 GRS Deltron Rapid Blender D8429

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE 1) Ensure that the panels involved are thoroughly cleaned. 2) Sand the area of repair with no coarser than P800 (wet) or P400 (dry) paper. 3) Key the surrounding area with a wet 1000 grade Trizact pad on a DA sander (3mm orbit).

Where or if Clearcoat or Direct Gloss is to be faded out (up a pillar) this area should be fnished with a wet Trizact 3000 pad. Prepare less accessible areas using D8407 WB Flatting Paste with an abrasive Scotchbrite™ Ultrafine (Grey) or Extra Fine (Copper) pad.

4) Thoroughly clean the area to be refinished with a suitable pre-cleaner, Tak rag off before painting.

5) When carrying out a large blend, e.g. wing into a door, it is often easier to temporarily mask off the panel to be blended.

6) Paint the repair in the usual way. 7) Remove the temporary masking, and using an arcing motion with the spraygun, extend

the repair into the blending area, arcing the gun away from the panel and leaving a fine, dry overspray edge.

GRS Deltron Aerosol Fade-Out Thinner D8730 and Rapid Blender D8429 offer an easy and simple fade-out process for GRS Deltron Progress UHS DG colours, and for UHS Clearcoats. They are formulated for easy application and have excellent overspray wetting properties, giving a high gloss and high quality finish to the fade-out process.

Refer to the individual Product Datasheets for general process information on the use of PPG topcoats. This datasheet covers the fade-out processes.

Aerosol Fade Out Thinner Rapid Blender


Page 2 of 2

UHS Clearcoat Process – D8730 Fade Out Thinner, D8429 Rapid Blender

1) After normal application the gun is arced into the fade-out area, which will leave an overspray edge. Care should be taken not apply the Clearcoat beyond the prepared fade-out area.

2) Apply D8730 Aerosol Fade Out Thinner (or D8429 Rapid Blender through a spraygun) to the clearcoat edge, in light coats, to melt the overspray edge. DO NOT apply in heavy coats.

3) Allow the paint film to cure thoroughly. 4) Lightly polish the fade-out area with polishing compound (SPP1001), taking care not to

polish through the blend. Finish with a finishing polish.

GRS Deltron Progress UHS Process - D8730 Fade Out Thinner, D8429 Rapid Blender

1) After normal application the gun is arced slightly part way into the fade-out area, which will leave an overspray edge.

2) Apply a coat of Clearcoat over the colour edge. Use the same hardener in the Clear that was used in the colour. After normal application the gun is arced slightly further into the fade-out area, which will leave a clearcoat overspray edge. Care should be taken not apply the Clearcoat beyond the prepared fade-out area.

3) Apply D8730 Aerosol Fade Out Thinner (or D8429 Rapid Blender through a spraygun) to the clearcoat edge, in light coats, to melt the overspray edge. DO NOT apply in heavy coats.

4) Allow the paint film to cure thoroughly. 5) Lightly polish the fade-out area with polishing compound (SPP1001), taking care not to

polish through the blend. Finish with a finishing polish.

VOC INFORMATION Fade Out Thinner, D8730 The EU limit value for this product (product category:IIB.e) in ready to use form is max. 840g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 840g/litre Depending upon the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.




Page 1

October 2006 TDS: RLD201V

Product Information

DELFLEET F3915

PRODUCT

Delfleet UHS Accelerator F3915

PRODUCT DRSCRIPTION Delfleet UHS Accelerator is designed to improve the through cure of both the Delfleet UHS Direct Gloss and

Delfleet UHS Clearcoat.

The catalyst technology of F3915 reduces dry and bake times without compromising any of the outstanding

properties associated with Delfleet UHS systems.


Page 2


Direct Gloss

By volume UHS DG 3 F3276 1 F330* 0.5

Clearcoat By volume

F3460 3.5 F3278 / F3279 1

Then add upto 50ml F3915 per litre of activated paint

Potlife at 20°C -: 1Hour

Viscosity:

Direct Gloss


Clearcoat


Gun set-up:

As standard

As standard

Number of coats: 1.5 - 2

1.5 - 2

20ºC Flash off:

Between coats Before bake Before Recoat

10-15 mins. 15-30 mins. 30-40mins.

10-15 mins. 15-30 mins.

30-40 mins

Drying time:

20°C Dust free: 20°C Through dry 60ºC Bake (metal temp.)

HVLP

10-15 mins.

4 Hours 30 mins.

PRESSURE

10-15 mins.

4 Hours 30 mins.

Dry film thickness:


50 µm 125µm 9m2/l

50 µm 125µm 9m2/l



Page 3

REPAIR & RECOATING

F3915 accelerates the curing of Delfleet UHS product systems and therefore changes their drying characteristics.

Film lifiting may occur under certain circumstances if Delfleet UHS systems are allowed to flash off for more than

30 mins. prior to recoating ; A flash off between 5 and 25 minutes is strongly recommended otherwise allow to dry

fully before subsequent coats are applied.


HEALTH AND SAFETY




Page 1 of 8


June 2010

Product Information GRS Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat D8141

PRODUCTS Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat D8141 Deltron UHS Hardeners D8216, D8217, D8218, D8219 Deltron Thinners D807, D812, D869 Deltron Accelerated Thinner D8714


PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat is a 2K acrylic urethane clearcoat for the repair and repainting of panels originally finished with clearcoat over a single or multistage colour basecoat system.

D8141 is designed for use over Envirobase basecoat colour. It may be used in 2 different modes, standard 2 coat application, or a "One Visit" application, where 1 medium / continuous coat is followed by a full coat with no flash off between coats.

Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat has an organic solvent content lower than conventional clearcoats. This makes it particularly suitable when operating in areas where VOC emissions or product VOC content is restricted and productivity is an issue.

D8141 Premium UHS Clearcoat


Page 2 of 8


Deltron D8141 Clear must be applied on top of clean and dust-free Envirobase basecoat. The use of a tack rag is recommended.

MIXING RATIO Mixing ratios with HS Hardener: By Volume By Weight D8141 3 vol See table, Page 5 HS Hardener* 1 vol Thinner* 0.6 vol

• Choose HS Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature *

• As with all ultra high solids products, cold ready for use paint temperatures can lead to more difficult application and overspray absorption. It is strongly recommended that ready for use product is applied at a temperature greater than 15°C

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION System UHS Hardener Thinner Bake Schedule Accelerated D8216 D8714 20 mins at 50°C / 10 mins at 60°C Accelerated D8217 D8714 40 mins at 50°C / 20 mins at 60°C Express D8216 D807 / D812 30 mins at 50°C / 15 mins at 60°C Fast D8217 D807 / D812 50 mins at 50°C / 25 mins at 60°C Standard D8218 D807 / D812 70 mins at 50°C / 35 mins at 60°C Slow - For high D8219 D812 / D869 80 mins at 50°C / 40 mins at 60°C Temperatures

The choice of thinner should be made according to application temperature, air movement and size of job.

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 20 minutes with D8216/7 and D8714 Accelerated Thinner 30 - 45 minutes with D8216 hardener 1 hour with D8217 hardener 2 - 2.5 hours with D8218/9 hardeners Spray viscosity at 20°C 18 - 20 seconds DIN4.


Page 3 of 8


Spraygun set-up: 1.3 - 1.4 mm Conventional Two Coat Process

Application Apply 2 single coats to give ~60 microns dry film build.

Flash off between spray coats 5 – 7 minutes Flash off before bake or IR dry 0 – 5 minutes

Express Single Visit Process

Application Apply 1 medium & 1 full coat to give 50-60 microns dry film build. The first coat should be applied to all repair panels before the second coat is applied.

Flash off between spray coats For less than 3 panels, 2-3 minutes flash off. For more than 3 panels, no flash off is required.


DRYING TIMES - Dust free time at 20°C 15 - 20 minutes with D8216/7 + D8714 20 - 30 minutes with D8217 40 - 50 minutes with D8218 60 minutes with D8219.

- Dry to handle at 20°C 1.5 - 2 hours with D8216/7 + D8714 4 hours with D8217 6 hours with D8218 8 hours with D8219.

- Through dry at 20°C 6 - 8 hours with D8216/7 + D8714 12 hours with D8217 16 hours with D8218 24 hours with D8219.

- Through dry at 50°C* 20 - 40 minutes with D8216/7 + D8714 50 minutes with D8217 70 minutes with D8218 80 minutes with D8219.

- Through dry at 60°C* 10 - 20 minutes with D8216/7 + D8714 25 minutes with D8217 35 minutes with D8218 40 minutes with D8219.

- Through dry at IR 8 - 15 minutes (depending upon colour) (medium wave)

Bake times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the bake schedule to allow metal to reach recommended temperature.

. Total dry film build:

Theoretical coverage:

50 – 60 µm

Assuming 100% transfer efficiency and dry film thickness as indicated: 8 m²/l


Page 4 of 8



- grade wet P800

- grade dry P400 - P500 Overcoat / Re-coat time:

- Force dry at 60°C, 70°C or IR

After cooling

- Air drying at 20°C 12 - 24 hours - depending on hardener.

Overcoat with: Deltron primers Envirobase Deltron topcoats

MATT, SATIN AND TEXTURED FINISHES PAINTING OF FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES

To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish with Deltron D8141 Premium UHS Clearcoat, it is necessary to include matt, flex or texture additives in the mix. Additives are also required when applying D8141 over a flexible substrate. The additives required and the appropriate volume and/or weight mix ratios are indicated in microfiches if relevant or in the tables below.

Note: The majority of plastics used on cars are considered Rigid. These plastics may have some flexibility when painted off the car, but are rigid once mounted. UHS Clearcoats only require the addition of the Plasticiser Additive (See Flexible chart below) when painting very flexible plastics, mostly found on older vehicles, e.g. foam type.

Cumulative Mixing by Weight

Do not tare the balance between additions Substrate Appearance D8141 D8456 D843 D844 D814 D819 UHS

Hardener Deltron Thinner

RIGID Gloss 639g - - - - - 870g 985g Satin 481g 724g - - - - 899g 985g Matt 386g 776g - - - - 916g 986g Matt

Textured 284g - 639g - - - 743g 957g

Leather Grain

392g - - 708g - - 850g 967g

FLEXIBLE Gloss 532g - - - 633g - 865g 979g Satin 250g 481g - - - 614g 818g 986g Matt 210g 562g - - - 674g 864g 990g Matt

Textured 210g - 522g - - 633g 824g 980g

Leather Grain

280g - - 506g - 655g 909g 992g


Page 5 of 8

POLISHING

If polishing is required, i.e. to remove dirt nibs, it is recommended that it is carried out between 1 hour and 24 hours after the quoted drying time. Use PPG Specialty Polishing system SPP1001.

FADE - OUT REPAIR PROCEDURE Apply D8141 Premium UHS Clearcoat according to the information above Take care to minimise the clearcoat edge in the fade-out area Melt overspray edge using D8730 Aerosol Fade-Out Thinner or D8429 Rapid Blender. Refer to datasheet No: RLD 199V for successful repair.

WEIGHT MIX TABLE FOR D8141 GUIDELINES FOR WEIGHT MIXING Where a specific volume of clearcoat mix is required, this may be best achieved by weight mixing, using the guidelines below. The weights are cumulative - please do NOT tare the balance between additions.


required (Litres)

Weight Clearcoat

D8141

Weight UHS Hardener D8216 / 7 / 8 / 9

Weight Thinner

D807, D812, D869, D8714

0.10 L 64 g 87 g 99 g 0.20 L 128 g 174 g 197 g 0.25 L

160 g 218 g 246 g

0.33 L

211 g 287 g 325 g 0.50 L

320 g 435 g 493 g

0.75 L

479 g 653 g 739 g 1.00 L

639 g 870 g 985 g

1.50 L

959 g 1305 g 1476 g 2.00 L

1278 g 1740 g 1970 g

2.50 L

1598 g 2175 g 2463 g


Page 6 of 8









Page 7 of 8

Global at a Glance D8141 GRS Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat Mixing by volume With UHS Hardener 3:1:0.6

Pot Life at 20°C Using D8216/7 + D8714 20 minutes Using D8216 30 - 45 minutes

Using D8217 60 minutes Using D8218/9 2 - 2.5 hours Hardener / Thinner Selection

To bake 10 minutes at 60°C D8216 UHS Hardener

D8714 – Accelerated thinner To bake 15 minutes at 60°C D8216 UHS Hardener D807 - Medium thinner To bake 20 minutes at 60°C D8217 UHS Hardener D8714 - Accelerated thinner

To bake 25 minutes at 60°C D8217 UHS Hardener D807or 812 - Thinner To bake 35 minutes at 60°C D8218 UHS Hardener D812 - Thinner

Application Viscosity 18 - 20 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.3 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Number of Coats Conventional - 2 single coats, 5 - 7 minute flash-off between coats. Express 1 light/medium coat, plus by 1 full coat. The first coat should be applied to all

repair panels before the second coat is applied. For less than 3 panels, allow 2-3 minutes flash off. For more than 3 panels, no flash off is required.

Drying Times Dust free at 20°C 15 - 20 mins with D8216/7 + D8714

20 minutes with D8216, 20 - 30 minutes with D8217 40 - 50 minutes with D8218 60 minutes with D8219.

Through dry at 60°C 10 - 20 minutes with D8216/7 + D8714 25 minutes with D8217 35 minutes with D8218 40 minutes with D8219.


Page 8 of 8





Page 1

October 2006 - updated 5th May 2010 TDS: RLD207V

Product Information

DELFLEET F3460

PRODUCT Delfleet UHS Clearcoat F3460

Delfleet UHS Hardener- Medium F3278

Delfleet UHS Hardener - Slow F3276

Delfleet UHS Hardener - Fast F3274

Delfleet UHS Matting Agent F3119

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Delfleet F3460 is a high quality 2-pack UHS Clearcoat specifically formulated to provide outstanding gloss and final appearance over Delfleet solventborne or waterborne basecoats. When used correctlly it fully meets the current European VOC legistlation of 420 g/l.


Prepare the substrate as follows: Delfleet, Deltron or Envirobase. The substrate to be painted must be dry , clean and free of grease.

Base coated areas left overnight must be tacked off prior to clearcoating Substrates need to be thoroughly prepared using D837 Spirit Wipe or D8401 low V.O.C. Cleaner.


Page 2


HVLP / Pressure By volume

F3460 3.5

F327* 1


F3460 3.5

F327* 1

Potlife at 20°C -: .1.5 Hours

Viscosity:

HVLP

17 - 25 sec.

DIN4/20ºC

PRESSURE

17 - 25 sec.

DIN4/20ºC

AIRLESS/AIRMIX

17-25 sec. DIN4/20°C

Gun set-up:

1.4-1.8 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

0.85.-1.1 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

Fluid 280-320

cc/min

9-11 thou

0.22-0.28mm

Airless-: 125 - 160

bar

Airmix-: 70 - 110 bari

20-25 psi at Air Cap

Number of coats: 1.5-2 1.5-2

1-2

20ºC Flash off: Between coats Before bake

15-20 mins. 5-10 mins.

15-20 mins. 5-10 mins

20 mins. 5-10 mins.

Drying time:

20°C Dust free: 20°C Through dry 60ºC Bake (Metal temp.)

HVLP 25-30’ 24 Hours 40 mins.

PRESSURE 25-30’ 24 Hours 40 mins.

AIRLESS / AIRMIX 30-40’ 24 hours 45-60 mins.

Dry film thickness:


50 µm 75µm 8m2/l

50 µm 75µm 8m2/l

75 µm 100 µm 8m2/l


Wet Flatting -: P800 or finer

Dry flatting -: P400-500

Overcoat with: After cooling , minimum 12 hours


Page 3

MATT, SEMI MATT AND SEMI GLOSS FINISHES To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or semi gloss finish with Delfleet UHS Clearcoat F3460, it is necessary to include UHS Matting Agent F3119 in the mix. The additive required and the appropriate volume mix ratios are indicated in the table below.

Notes:

1. After adding the UHS Matting agent to the clear, stir thoroughly to ensure a homogeneous mix, before adding UHS hardener.

2. The final gloss level obtained will be dependent upon application and drying conditions, and film thickness. It is therefore recommended to apply a test panel to check the gloss level, before painting.

Appearance F3460 F3119 UHS Hardener Gloss 3.5 - 1 Semi-Gloss 3 1 1 Semi-Matt 8 4 3 Matt 2 2 1

HVLP / COMPLIANT SPRAYGUNS The most suitable type of HVLP / Compliant sprayguns for the painting of Commercial Transport products are a pressure fed system. Note: If long compressed air lines are used, an increase in pressure will be needed. Air Cap Pressure for HVLP - 0.68 Bar (10 psi) Paint Pressure - 2 / 2.5 Bar inlet

DRYING TIMES The drying times quoted above are approximate times and will vary depending upon drying conditions and film thickness. Poor ventilation, temperatures below 20°C and high film thicknesses will extend drying times. Large vehicles or Heavy section Chassis parts will need extended baking schedules to reach the required Time at Temperature.

NOTES: Allow finishes to harden thoroughly before subjecting to vehicle washes. It is recommended that Delfleet 2K Clears are allowed to cure for at least 7 days prior to any decal application.



Page 4

The EU limit for this product (product category:IIB.d) in ready for use form is max. 420g/l of VOC.

The VOC content of this product in ready for use form is max. 420 g/l. Depending on the chosen mode of use,

the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.

HEALTH AND SAFETY




Page 1 of 7


May 2011

Product Information ENVIROBASE HIGH PERFORMANCE

Envirobase Waterborne Basecoat colour T4xx Envirobase Thinner T494 Envirobase Slow Thinner T495 High Performance Additive T492

PRODUCTS Envirobase High Performance is waterborne basecoat mixing scheme that significantly reduces solvent emissions into the environment and complies with all current and future legislative requirements.

Applied as a part of a two-stage or multi-stage basecoat paint system, mixed Envirobase High Performance colour reproduces original solid, metallic, mica or special effect paint finishes, giving excellent covering power and fade out capability.

In conjunction with high quality PPG Clearcoats and Primers, the Envirobase High Performance system delivers excellent gloss and durability. Easy to use, this is a simple and flexible system capable of high quality vehicle repairs.

ENVIROBASE HIGH PERFORMANCE EXPRESS This is the system to use where high productivity is required. It incorporates accelerated, warm air movement over the surface of the paint film during the flash off periods.

The system raises the booth temperature to between 40 - 45oC during the Envirobase High Performance flash-off period, thereby reducing humidity by about 50%. This process / system has a different application process to the normal

Envirobase High Performance application. By using the Envirobase High Performance Express system, application & drying times can be dramatically reduced, giving quicker process times.


Page 2 of 7

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Apply over original stoved 2K finishes, or a range of PPG GRS Deltron primers - refer to primer TDS for specific recommendations. The use of GreyMatic primers is recommended for optimum results. Note: Do not apply over 2K Etch Primers

Degrease all surfaces to be painted with appropriate PPG waterborne substrate cleaner before wet sanding with P800 grade paper or dry sanding with P500 grade paper.

Wash off residues and dry thoroughly before re-cleaning with appropriate waterborne PPG precleaner see - Technical Data Sheet Deltron Cleaners RLD63V. The use of a tack-rag is recommended.

PRE-APPLICATION Hand-shake bottles of Envirobase High Performance tinter for a few seconds before use. Do not shake vigorously. Mixed Envirobase High Performance colour should be thoroughly hand-stirred before application. If not used immediately it should be hand-stirred again before use. Use nylon paint filters specially designed for use with waterborne paint materials. A 125 micron mesh is recommended, 190 microns maximum.

MIXING RATIOS Mixing Ratios with Envirobase High Performance Colour

By Volume

Envirobase Solid Colours 100 Vols Thinner T494/T495 10 Vols Envirobase Metallic or Mica Colours 100 Vols Thinner T494/T495 20 Vols At high temperatures, (above 30°C), 30% of thinner may be used to help application, laydown and overspray absorption.

Note: If the 10% thinner addition is used, then it is very important to strictly observe the flash off times between coats and before the application of clearcoat.

Viscosity will vary with the thinner level chosen, but the ideal application viscosity is 22 - 26 seconds / DIN4 / 20°C

Potlife: 3 months. Stir well before use

THINNER SELECTION Temperature Thinner Below 35°C T494 - Envirobase Thinner Above 35°C T495 - Envirobase Slow Thinner


Page 3 of 7

ENVIROBASE HIGH PERFORMANCE - STANDARD PROCESS


Spraygun set-up: 1.2 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Set pressure according to manufacturers recommendations

Application:

Apply single coats until opacity is obtained.

Flash off thoroughly between coats. Air movers can be used top accelerate drying

Metallic control coat For optimum metallic control, apply control coat at a spraygun inlet pressure of 1.2 - 1.5 bar onto a dry film. For optimum process speed, the control coat may be applied onto a "half dry" film once opacity is reached

Flash-off at 20ºC 60% relative humidity: - before clearcoat

Basecoat must be uniformly matt and dry before application of clearcoat.


ENVIROBASE HIGH PERFORMANCE - EXPRESS PROCESS


Spraygun set-up: 1.2 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Set pressure according to manufacturers

recommendations

Number of coats: Apply as light even double coats until opacity is obtained. Heavy application must be avoided, or aeration/popping may result.

Flash off:

Use air movement plus heat to accelerate drying, - for example Envirobase Express system.


Before clearcoat: Basecoats should be uniformly matt and dry before clearcoat application



Page 4 of 7

REPAIR AND RECOATING Overcoating: Envirobase High Performance must be overcoated with a

GRS Deltron clearcoat after the minimum flash times.

Recoat time: After 24 hours, 1 coat of Envirobase has to be applied prior to the clearcoat application. The maximum recoat time is 48 hours.

De-nib: It is possible to de-nib Envirobase, after 20 minutes flash off, with fine sanding paper – P1500 (wet/dry paper) using air blowing and a tack rag to remove sanding dust and followed by a spot repair (see FADING-OUT section) prior to the clearcoat application.

Overcoat with: A wide range of Deltron Clearcoats.


FADE-OUT TECHNIQUE Fading-out Envirobase is necessary for spot repair and advised when metallic or mica colours have to be repaired.

Apply basecoat to the prepared area to obliterate the primed area. Reduce the pressure at the spraygun and fade into the surrounding area. Flash off until uniformly matt, for larger areas apply final control coat (metallics and micas) before applying clear.

Alternatively use T490 as follows : Prepare Envirobase colour as specified in the datasheet. Using light inward strokes reach coverage on the repaired area. Thin one part of the ready for use Envirobase with one part of T490 ready to use Use this mixture to fade the repair edges spraying from the outside to the inside the repair area. Repeat the last step until the potential colour difference has been lost. Allow the repair become uniformly matt and dry before clearcoating.

EQUIPMENT CLEANING


Use tap water, with a final rinse using deionised water or an alcohol-based cleaner such as D846.



Page 5 of 7

ENVIROBASE HIGH PERFORMANCE ADDITIVE – T492 High Performance Additive – T492 has been developed as alternative to the standard Envirobase High Performance Thinners to provide additional to protection in high risk areas of the vehicle e.g. on low profile front ends prone to stone chips, or in extreme conditions like driving at high speed on gravel roads, or when subjected to high pressure washing. MIXING RATIOS Mixing Ratios with Envirobase High Performance Colour

By Volume

Envirobase Metallic Colours (greater than 70% Aluminium) 100 Vols High Performance Additive T492 10 Vols Thinner T494/T495 10 Vols (minimum) Envirobase All Other Colours 100 Vols High Performance Additive T492 10 Vols Thinner T494/T495 5 Vols (minimum) Thinner selection Below 35°C T494 Above 35°C T495 At high temperatures, (above 30°C), 20% of thinner (i.e. an additional 10 - 15%) may be used to help application, laydown and overspray absorption.


Potlife: 3 months. Stir well before use Note: Application, flash off and drying are the same as with the Envirobase High Performance standard process.


Page 6 of 7

Global at a Glance High Performance Envirobase Envirobase Waterborne Basecoat Topcoat Envirobase Express Process

Mixing by volume

Solid Colours - With Thinner** 100 Vols : 10 Vols Metallic and Mica Colours - with Thinner** 100 Vols : 20 Vols* * 30 vols may be used when the application temperature is above 30°C Pot Life at 20°C 3 months. Stir well before use. **Thinner selection Below 35°C - T494 Above 35°C - T495

Ideal Application viscosity Viscosity will vary with the thinner level chosen, but the ideal application viscosity is 22 - 26 seconds / DIN4 / 20°C

Spraygun Size 1.2 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Number of Coats Standard Process Apply single light coats until opacity is obtained. Flash off thoroughly between coats A control coat is recommended for flake colours Express Process Apply as light even double coats until opacity is obtained. A control coat is recommended for flake colours Drying Times Standard Process / Express Process : Use an air blower until surface is touch dry. Minimum - Basecoat to be dry and matt before the application of Clearcoat Maximum - 48 hours at 20°C before application of Clearcoat, but after 24 hours 1 coat of Envirobase must be applied before clearcoating. 20 minutes at 20°C before taping

Overcoating Envirobase Basecoat colours can be overcoated with a wide range of PPG Clearcoats. See Clearcoat Data Sheet for details.


Page 7 of 7



Envirobase High Performance tinters, mixed colour & T494 / T495 thinners should be stored in a cool, dry place away from sources of heat. During storage and transportation temperatures must be maintained at a minimum of +5°C and a maximum of +35°C. Avoid exposure to frost or freezing conditions.

Envirobase should be mixed in clean, dry containers and equipment. Do not use mixing vessels or spray equipment that contains solvent residues. Mixing vessels should ideally be plastic - if metallic they should have an internal anti-corrosion coating.

VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.d) in ready to use form is max. 420g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 420g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code. WASTE HANDLING & DISPOSAL / HEALTH & SAFETY

These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com Store waterborne & solventborne wastes separately. All wastes must be handled by a competent agent with appropriate certification. Waste must not be disposed of into drains or watercourses.

Copyright © 2011 PPG Industries, all rights reserved



These products are for professional use only Page 1

RLD214V


November 2006

Product Information ENVIROBASE FLOCCULATING AGENT Envirobase Flocculating Agent T499

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION T499 Flocculating Agent has been developed as a flocculating powder for the easy and efficient treatment of waste water contaminated with PPG Envirobase waterborne paint residue during the spraygun cleaning process. This product is effective for the treatment of waterborne waste only and should not be used with solvent-borne waste.


RLD214V

SPRAYGUN CLEANING Water is recommended for Spraygun cleaning.

1. Remove the air cap and clean as necessary 2. Decant excess paint from pot into a waste paint container 3. Half fill the pot with water and shake vigorously 4. Empty the resulting waste into the gun cleaning machine 5. Clean off any remaining paint 6. Remove pot and rinse it 7. Clean the internal channels with fresh clean water 8. When the gun is completely clean, re-assemble and flush gun with a small amount of

T494 Envirobase Thinner. 9. Ensure that the spraygun is completely dry before storing or re-using.

Note: Refer to the spraygun cleaning machine manual, before using it for the first time.

WASTE TREATMENT On average, 20 - 50 sprayguns can be washed before the sump is full of waste (25 - 30L). Each new container of T499 powder must be shaken before use. The container is opened as described by the instructions on the lid. Vigorous stirring using an air stirrer is the best route to ensure efficient flocculation.

1. When the sump is full, remove any separating mesh and stir vigorously 2. Add 100g of T499 (1 scoop) to the stirring mixture and continue stirring for 5 minutes. 3. Stop stirring and allow the solid waste to settle. 4. Check that the liquid is completely clear; 5. If not, repeat steps 2 to 4, before continuing the process. 6. Place filter in waste container and open valve at base of machine sump. 7. When the waste treatment sump is empty, wipe the sides, the base and the stirrer before

replacing the separating mesh.(Ensure that mesh is free from powder residue).

WASTE DISPOSAL The sludge collected in the filter is classified as "Controlled Waste" and should be disposed off according to local regulations. The filtrate (liquid) produced from this waste treatment process should not be disposed of into a public sewer without obtaining specific advance authorisation from the local or national water authority. Prior to authorisation, the filtrate can be re-used a number of times for cleaning sprayguns (hereafter referred to as "re-cycled water"). This recycle option is only recommended in combination with a centrally approved manual spraygun cleaning machine such as the Drester 1000 or 2000. The treated water can be recycled a maximum of 10 times before being replaced with fresh water. Recycled water is classified as "Controlled Waste" and should be disposed off according to local regulations. When authorisation has been obtained for disposal to a public sewer, the recycled water method is no longer necessary and therefore fresh water should then be used for all spraygun cleaning purposes.


RLD214V

STORAGE & HANDLING Precautions should be taken to ensure that T499 powder is not inhaled. It is recommended that a dust mask is worn when the powder is being added to the waste mixture. Gloves should be worn when cleaning the waste sump. T499 should be stored in a cool dry place separate from any paint or solvents.






April 2009

Product Information GRS Deltron Matt Clearcoat D8113

PRODUCTS Deltron Matt Clearcoat D8113 Deltron MS Hardeners D864, D803, D841, D861 Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION D8113 is designed for use over Envirobase or GRS Deltron basecoats.

Deltron Matt Clearcoat is a versatile 2K acrylic urethane clearcoat designed for the specialised repairs of vehicles or areas of vehicles originally finished with matt clearcoat over a single or multistage colour basecoat system. D8113 may be used over rigid plastics without the need for special additives.

D8113 Matt Clearcoat can be used with Deltron MS hardeners D864 / 803 / 841 / D861.

D8113 Matt Clearcoat



Deltron D8113 Clear must be applied on top of a clean and dust-free basecoat. The use of a tack cloth is recommended.

MIXING RATIO Mixing ratios with MS Hardeners D864 / D803 / D841 / D861 By Volume By Weight D8113 4 volumes See table, Page 4 MS Hardener* 1 volume Thinner* 1.2 volumes

• Choose MS Hardener / Thinner according to application temperature *

• As with all high solids products, cold ready for use paint temperatures can lead to more difficult application and overspray absorption.

HARDENER SELECTION System MS Hardener Bake Schedule For use at Temperatures D864 Express 25 minutes @ 60°C 18 - 25°C For use at Temperatures D803 Fast 30 minutes @ 60°C 25 - 35°C For use at Temperatures D841 Medium 30 minutes @ 60°C Above 35°C For use on large areas and/or extreme D861 Slow 30 minutes @ 60°C temperatures Note: The choice of thinner depends upon size of area to be painted.

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 2 hours with D803 hardener Spray viscosity at 20°C 16 - 18 seconds DIN4.



Spraygun set-up: 1.2 - 1.4 mm Conventional Two Coat Process

Application Apply 2 single coats to give 50 - 60 microns dry film build.

Flash off between spray coats 5 - 10 minutes - for best results, allow to dry matt Flash off before bake or IR dry 5 - 10 minutes - for best results, allow to dry matt

For Optimum results on large horizontal surfaces, allow 10 minutes between the first and second coat. 1 minute after the second coat, apply a low pressure "Drop coat" into the wet film. (1.5 bar at the spraygun)

DRYING TIMES

- Dust free time at 20°C 20 minutes with D803,

- Dry to handle at 20°C 2 hours with D803

- Through dry at 20°C 8 hours with D803

- Through dry at 60°C* 25 minutes with D864, 30 minutes with D803/D841/D861


*Bake times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the bake schedule to allow metal to reach recommended temperature.

. Total dry film build: Theoretical coverage:

50 – 60 µm





- grade wet P800


- Force dry at 60°C, or IR

After cooling

- Air drying at 20°C 12 hours


WEIGHT MIX TABLE FOR D8113

Target Volume of RFU Paint required (Litres)

Weight Clearcoat

D8113 (g)

Weight MS Hardeners

D864/D803/D841/D861 (g)

Weight D808, D807, D812 or

D869 Thinner (g)

DO NOT TARE THE SCALE BETWEEN ADDITIONS

0.10 L 67 83 100

0.20 L 134 167 201

0.25 L 167 209 251

0.33 L 221 275 331

0.50 L 334 417 502

0.75 L 501 626 753

1.00 L 668 834 1004

1.50 L 1003 1251 1506

2.00 L 1337 1668 2008

2.50 L 1671 2085 2509


Global at a Glance D8113 GRS Deltron Matt Clearcoat Mixing by volume With MS Hardener 4 : 1 : 1.2

Pot Life at 20°C Using D803 2 hours Hardener Selection

For application temperatures D864 Accelerated Hardener 18 - 25°C

For application temperatures D803 Fast Hardener 25 - 35°C For application temperatures D841 Medium Hardener Above 35°C For application on large areas D861 Slow Hardener or extreme temperatures

Application Viscosity 16 - 18 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.2 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Number of Coats Conventional -

2 single coats, 5 - 10 minute flash-off between coats. 5 - 10 minutes flash off before baking.

Drying Times Dust free at 20°C 20 minutes with D864,

Through dry at 60°C 25 minutes with D864 30 minutes with D803 / D841 / D861


PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS The Gloss levels achieved with this clear may vary depending upon film thickness and application. Low film thickness and dry application will give a Low Gloss. High film thickness and wet application will give a higher gloss level. It is recommended that this clear be used for complete panel repair only.


Copyright © 2009 PPG Industries, all rights reserved.




Page 1


June 2007

Product Information Equipment Cleaners

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PPG equipment cleaners are designed to facilitate the cleaning of equipment used during the mixing and application of PPG solvent based (D8423) and water based (T497) products. Equipment cleaners will easily remove paint and dirt on external spraygun surfaces.

USE Thoroughly clean the spraygun with Guncleaner and dry with a clean cloth. It is recommended that the equipment is cleaned immediately after use to avoid the drying and formation of deposits that can prove difficult to remove, and which could compromise the efficiency of the spraygun, or other contaminated equipment. DISPOSAL Guncleaners and subsequent waste created should be disposed of properly and in accordance with local authority regulations. Under no circumstances should waterborne waste be disposed of into a local public sewer without prior written authorization from the local authority. VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: llB.a) in ready to use form is max. 850g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 850g/litre.

Gunwash – D8423 Envirobase Gun Cleaner – T497


Page 2


PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD,England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480



Page 1

May 2007 TDS: RLD227V

Product Information

DELFLEET F3119

PRODUCT Delfleet UHS Matting Agent F3119

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Delfleet UHS Matting Agent F3119 has been designed to reduce gloss in Delfleet UHS providing special matt finishes


Prepare the Substrate as follows: Substrates Original finishes and work in sound condition need to be degreased , cleaned and dry sanded with P320-P360 (P600 wet) prior to topcoat application. Steel, Aluminum, GRP & Zinc coated steel need to be pre-primed with the appropriate Delfleet primer in order to ensure correct intercoat adhesion and substrate protection. Do not use F3112 over -: Acrylic Thermoplastic Finishes Synthetic finishes If used over Water based primers , ensure primer is fully cured prior to topcoating.

CLEANING

The substrate to be painted must be dry, clean, and free of corrosion, grease & mould release agents. Substrates need to be thoroughly prepared using a combination of D845 Degreaser & D837 Spirit Wipe ( or D842 low V.O.C. cleaner )


Page 2

APPLICATION GUIDE The Gloss of Delfleet UHS F3113, can be reduced by adding UHS Matting Agent F3119 in the following ratios:

Finish Semi-gloss Eggshell Matt

UHS Topcoat Colour

mixed with F3113 3.5 6.5 3

UHS Matting Agent F3119

3 6.5 3.5

Hardener

1 2 1

Thinner

0.5 1

0.5

The reduction in gloss levels varies between different colours, substrates, application/drying conditions and film thicknesses. It is advisable to spray a test panel before use and adjust the level of F3119 if necessary.


The EU limit for this product (product category:IIB.e) in ready for use form is max. 840g/l of VOC.



HEALTH AND SAFETY




Page 1


January 2008

Product Information ENVIROBASE READY MIX

Envirobase Ready Mix Colour T-XXX Envirobase Thinner T494 Envirobase Slow Thinner T495

PRODUCTS Envirobase Ready Mix is a waterborne basecoat colour that significantly reduces solvent emissions into the environment and complies with all current and future legislative requirements.

Applied as a part of a two-stage basecoat paint system, Envirobase Ready Mix colour reproduces original solid, metallic or mica paint finishes, giving excellent covering power and fade out capability. In conjunction with high quality PPG Clearcoats and Primers, the Envirobase Ready Mix system delivers excellent gloss and durability. Easy to use, this is a simple and flexible system capable of high quality vehicle repairs.

ENVIROBASE READY MIX EXPRESS This is the system to use where high productivity is required. It incorporates accelerated, warm air movement over the surface of the paint film during the flash off periods.

The system raises the booth temperature to between 40 - 45oC during the Envirobase Ready Mix flash-off period, thereby reducing humidity by about 50%. This process / system has a different application process to the normal Envirobase Ready Mix application. By using the Envirobase Ready Mix Express system, application & drying times can be dramatically reduced, giving quicker process times.


Page 2

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Apply over original stoved 2K finishes, or a range of PPG GRS Deltron primers - refer to primer TDS for specific recommendations. The use of GreyMatic primers is recommended for optimum results. Note: Do not apply over 2K Etch Primers

Degrease all surfaces to be painted with appropriate PPG waterborne substrate cleaner before wet sanding with P800 grade paper or dry sanding with P500 grade paper.

Wash off residues and dry thoroughly before re-cleaning with appropriate waterborne PPG precleaner see - Technical Data Sheet Deltron Cleaners RLD63V. The use of a tack-rag is recommended.

PRE-APPLICATION Hand-shake bottles of Envirobase Ready Mix colour for a few seconds before use. Do not shake vigorously.

Ensure that the correct undercoat shade (G1, G2 etc) is applied as recommended on the Envirobase Ready Mix container.

Use nylon paint filters specially designed for use with waterborne paint materials. A 125 micron mesh is recommended, 190 microns maximum.

MIXING RATIOS Mixing Ratios with Envirobase Ready Mix Colour

By Volume

Solid Colours 100 Vols Thinner T494/T495 10 Vols Metallic or Mica Colours 100 Vols Thinner T494/T495 20 Vols Thinner selection Below 35°C T494 Above 35°C T495 At high temperatures, (above 30°C), 30 parts of thinner may be used to help application, laydown and overspray absorption.

Note: If the 10 parts thinner addition is used, then it is very important to strictly observe the flash off times between coats and before the application of clearcoat.


Potlife: 3 months. Stir well before use


Page 3

ENVIROBASE READY MIX - STANDARD PROCESS


Spraygun set-up: 1.2 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Set pressure according to manufacturers recommendations

Application:

Apply single coats until opacity is obtained.

Flash off thoroughly between coats. Air movers can be used top accelerate drying

Metallic control coat For optimum metallic control, apply control coat at a spraygun inlet pressure of 1.2 - 1.5 bar onto a dry film. For optimum process speed, the control coat may be applied onto a "half dry" film once opacity is reached

Flash-off at 20ºC 60% relative humidity: - before clearcoat

Basecoat must be uniformly matt and dry before application of clearcoat.


ENVIROBASE READY MIX - EXPRESS PROCESS


Spraygun set-up: 1.2 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Set pressure according to manufacturers

recommendations

Number of coats: Apply as light even double coats until opacity is obtained. Heavy application must be avoided, or aeration/popping may result.

Flash off:

Use air movement plus heat to accelerate drying, - for example Envirobase Express system.



Page 4

Before clearcoat: Basecoats should be uniformly matt and dry before clearcoat application


REPAIR AND RECOATING Overcoating: Envirobase Ready Mix must be overcoated with a Deltron

UHS clearcoat after the minimum flash times.

Recoat time: After 24 hours, 1 coat of Envirobase Ready Mix has to be applied prior to the clearcoat application. The maximum recoat time is 48 hours.

De-nib: It is possible to de-nib Envirobase Ready Mix, after 20 minutes flash off, with fine sanding paper – P1500 (wet/dry paper) using air blowing and a tack rag to remove sanding dust and followed by a spot repair (see FADING-OUT section) prior to the clearcoat application.

Overcoat with: Deltron UHS Clearcoats.


FADE-OUT TECHNIQUE Fading-out Envirobase Ready Mix is necessary for spot repair and advised when metallic or mica colours have to be repaired.

Apply basecoat to the prepared area to obliterate the primed area. Reduce the pressure at the spraygun and fade into the surrounding area. Flash off until uniformly matt, for larger areas apply final control coat (metallics and micas) before applying clear.

Alternatively use T490 as follows : Prepare colour as specified in the datasheet. Using light inward strokes reach coverage on the repaired area. Thin one part of the ready for use colour with one part of T490 ready to use Use this mixture to fade the repair edges spraying from the outside to the inside the repair area. Repeat the last step until the potential colour difference has been lost. Allow the repair become uniformly matt and dry before clearcoating.

EQUIPMENT CLEANING




Page 5

Global at a Glance Envirobase Ready Mix Waterborne Basecoat Envirobase Ready Mix Express Process

Mixing by volume

Solid Colours - With Thinner T494/495 100 Vols : 10 Vols Metallic and Mica Colours - with T494/495 100 Vols : 20 Vols* * 30 vols may be used when the application temperature is above 30°C Thinner selection Below 35°C T494 Above 35°C T495 Pot Life at 20°C 3 months. Stir well before use. Ideal Application viscosity


Spraygun Size 1.2 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Number of Coats Standard Process Apply single light coats until opacity is obtained. Flash off thoroughly between coats A control coat is recommended for flake colours Express Process Apply as light even double coats until opacity is obtained. A control coat is recommended for flake colours Drying Times Standard Process / Express Process : Use an air blower until surface is touch dry. Minimum - Basecoat to be dry and matt before the application of Clearcoat Maximum - 48 hours at 20°C before application of Clearcoat, but

after 24 hours, 1 coat of Envirobase Ready Mix has to be applied prior to clearcoating

20 minutes at 20°C before taping


Page 6

Overcoating Envirobase Ready Mix colours can be overcoated with a range of PPG UHS Clearcoats. See Clearcoat Data Sheet for details.



Envirobase Ready Mix colour & T494 thinner should be stored in a cool, dry place away from sources of heat. During storage and transportation temperatures must be maintained at a minimum of +5°C and a maximum of +35°C. Avoid exposure to frost or freezing conditions.

Envirobase Ready Mix should be mixed in clean, dry containers and equipment. Do not use mixing vessels or spray equipment that contains solvent residues. Mixing vessels should ideally be plastic - if metallic they should have an internal anti-corrosion coating.

VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.d) in ready to use form is max. 420g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 420g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code. WASTE HANDLING & DISPOSAL / HEALTH & SAFETY

These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: http://www.ppg.com/PPG_MSDS Store waterborne & solventborne wastes separately. All wastes must be handled by a competent agent with appropriate certification. Waste must not be disposed of into drains or watercourses.

PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD,



Page 7

England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480


Page 1 of 9


June 2010

Product Information Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat D8138

PRODUCTS Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat D8138 Deltron UHS Hardeners D897, D8208, Deltron Thinners D807, D812, D869 Deltron Low VOC Thinners D8718, D8719


PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat is a 2K acrylic urethane clearcoat for the repair and repainting of panels originally finished with clearcoat over a single or multistage colour basecoat system.

D8138 is designed for use over Envirobase basecoat colour. It may be used in 2 different modes, "One Visit" application, where 1 medium / continuous coat is followed by a full coat with no flash off between coats. or a standard 2 coat application,

Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat in combination with these particular hardeners gives excellent scratch resistance as required by many OEM's.

D8138 Premium UHS Clearcoat


Page 2 of 9


Deltron D8138 Clear must be applied on top of clean and dust-free Envirobase basecoat. The use of a tack rag is recommended.

MIXING RATIO Mixing ratios with HS Hardener: By Volume By Weight D8138 3 vol See table, Page 5 HS Hardener* 1 vol Thinner* 0.4 vol

• Choose HS Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature *

• As with all ultra high solids products, cold ready for use paint temperatures can lead to more difficult application and overspray absorption. It is strongly recommended that ready for use product is applied at a temperature greater than 15°C

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION System UHS Hardener Thinner Bake Schedule Fast D8208 D807 / D812 or D8718 30 mins at 60°C Standard D897 D807 / D812 or D8718/9 40 mins at 60°C Slow - For high D897 D812 / D869 or D8719 40 mins at 60°C Temperatures

The choice of thinner should be made according to application temperature, air movement and size of job.

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 30 - 40 minutes with D8208 hardener 1 - 1.5 hours with D897 hardener Spray viscosity at 20°C 18 - 20 seconds DIN4.


Page 3 of 9



Express Single Visit Process Application Apply 1 medium & 1 full coat to give 50-60 microns

dry film build. The first coat should be applied to all repair panels before the second coat is applied.

Flash off between spray coats For less than 3 panels, 2-3 minutes flash off. For more than 3 panels, no flash off is required.


Conventional Two Coat Process Application Apply 2 single coats to give ~60 microns dry film

build. Flash off between spray coats 5 – 7 minutes Flash off before bake or IR dry 0 – 5 minutes

DRYING TIMES

- Dust free time at 20°C 20 - 30 minutes with D8208 40 - 50 minutes with D897

- Dry to handle at 20°C 4 hours with D8208 6 hours with D897

- Through dry at 20°C 12 hours with D8208 16 hours with D897

- Through dry at 60°C* 30 minutes with D8208 40 minutes with D897.


Bake times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the bake schedule to allow metal to reach recommended temperature.

. Total dry film build: Theoretical coverage: 50 – 60 µm



Page 4 of 9



- grade wet P800


- Force dry at 60°C, 70°C or IR

After cooling

- Air drying at 20°C 12 - 24 hours - depending on hardener.

Overcoat with: Deltron primers, Envirobase, Deltron topcoats

MATT, SATIN AND TEXTURED FINISHES PAINTING OF FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES

To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish with Deltron D8138 Premium UHS Clearcoat, it is necessary to include matt, flex or texture additives in the mix. Additives are also required when applying D8138 over a flexible substrate. The additives required and the appropriate volume and/or weight mix ratios are indicated in microfiches if relevant or in the tables below. Note: The majority of plastics used on cars are considered Rigid. These plastics may have some flexibility when painted off the car, but are rigid once mounted. UHS Clearcoats only require the addition of the Plasticiser Additive (See Flexible chart below) when painting very flexible plastics, mostly found on older vehicles, e.g. foam type.

Cumulative Mixing by Weight

Do not tare the balance between additions Substrate Appearance D8138 D8456 D843 D844 D814 D819 UHS

Hardener Deltron Thinner

RIGID Gloss 670g - - - - - 912g 992g Satin 393g 755g - - - - 894g 985g Matt 281g 657g - - - - 758g 967g

Matt Textured

288g - 643g - - - 746g 960g

Leather Grain

393g - - 710g - - 852g 969g

FLEXIBLE Gloss 561g - - - 667g - 910g 990g Satin 295g 566g - - - 723g 962g 1006g Matt 227g 606g - - - 727g 932g 999g

Matt Textured

211g - 522g - - 634g 824g 981g

Leather Grain

281g - - 507g - 656g 910g 993g


Page 5 of 9

Cumulative Mixing by Weight using Low VOC Deltron Thinners

Do not tare the balance between additions

Substrate Appearance D8138 D8456 D843 D844 D814 D819 UHS

Hardener Deltron

Low VOC

Thinner RIGID Gloss 670g - - - - - 912g 987g Satin 393g 755g - - - - 894g 979g Matt 281g 657g - - - - 758g 953g

Matt Textured

288g - 643g - - - 746g 946g

Leather Grain

393g - - 710g - - 852g 961g

FLEXIBLE Gloss 561g - - - 667g - 915g 985g Satin 295g 566g - - - 723g 962g - Matt 227g 606g - - - 727g 932g -

Matt Textured

211g - 522g - - 634g 824g -

Leather Grain

281g - - 507g - 656g 910g -

Note: Use of the above additives for plastics, will significantly reduce the scratch resistance of this clearcoat.

POLISHING

If polishing is required, i.e. to remove dirt nibs, it is recommended that it is carried out between 1 hour and 24 hours after the quoted drying time. Use PPG Specialty Polishing system SPP1001.

FADE - OUT REPAIR PROCEDURE Apply D8138 Premium UHS Clearcoat according to the information above Take care to minimise the clearcoat edge in the fade-out area Melt overspray edge using D8730 Aerosol Fade-Out Thinner or D8429 Rapid Blender. Refer to datasheet No: RLD 199V for successful repair.


Page 6 of 9

WEIGHT MIX TABLE FOR D8138 Using Standard Deltron Thinners GUIDELINES FOR WEIGHT MIXING Where a specific volume of clearcoat mix is required, this may be best achieved by weight mixing, using the guidelines below. The weights are cumulative - please do NOT tare the balance between additions.


required (Litres)

Weight Clearcoat

D8138

Weight UHS Hardener D897 / D8208

Weight Thinner

D807, D812, D869

0.10 L 68 g 92 g 99 g

0.20 L 135 g 184 g 198 g 0.25 L

169 g 229 g 249 g

0.33 L

223 g 303 g 329 g 0.50 L

339 g 459 g 498 g

0.75 L

508 g 688 g 747 g 1.00 L

677 g 918 g 996 g

1.50 L

1016 g 1376 g 1494 g 2.00 L

1354 g 1835 g 1992 g

2.50 L

1693 g 2294 g 2490 g

Using Low VOC Deltron Thinners

GUIDELINES FOR WEIGHT MIXING Where a specific volume of clearcoat mix is required, this may be best achieved by weight mixing, using the guidelines below. The weights are cumulative - please do NOT tare the balance between additions.


required (Litres)

Weight Clearcoat

D8138

Weight UHS Hardener D897 / D8208

Weight Low VOC Thinner

D8718, D8719

0.10 L 68 g 92 g 97 g

0.20 L 135 g 184 g 194 g 0.25 L

169 g 229 g 242 g

0.33 L

223 g 303 g 320 g 0.50 L

339 g 459 g 484 g

0.75 L

508 g 688 g 726 g 1.00 L

677 g 918 g 968 g

1.50 L

1016 g 1376 g 1452 g 2.00 L

1354 g 1835 g 1936 g

2.50 L

1693 g 2294 g 2420 g


Page 7 of 9









Page 8 of 9

Global at a Glance D8138 GRS Deltron Premium UHS Clearcoat Mixing by volume With UHS Hardener 3:1:0.4

Pot Life at 20°C Using D8208 30 - 40 minutes Using D897 1 - 1.5 hours Hardener / Thinner Selection

To bake 30 minutes at 60°C D8208 UHS Hardener D807or 812 - Thinner or D8718

To bake 40 minutes at 60°C D897 UHS Hardener D812 - Thinner or D8719

Application Viscosity 18 - 20 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.3 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Number of Coats Express 1 light/medium coat, plus by 1 full coat. The first coat should be applied to all repair panels before the second coat is applied. For less than 3 panels, allow 2-3 minutes flash off. For more than 3 panels, no flash off is required. Conventional - 2 single coats, 5 - 7 minute flash-off between coats Drying Times Dust free at 20°C 20 - 30 minutes with D8208 40 - 50 minutes with D897

Through dry at 60°C 30 minutes with D8208 40 minutes with D897.


Page 9 of 9

VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.d) in ready to use form is max. 420g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 420g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code. Note: Combinations of this product with D8456, D814, D819, D843 or D844 will produce a paint film with special properties as defined by the EU Directive code. In these specific combinations: The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.e) in ready to use form is max. 840g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 840g/litre.

HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England.

Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480





Page 1


May 2009

Product Information WATERBORNE EPOXY PRIMER

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Waterborne Epoxy Primer is a two component primer that has excellent sealing properties over paint films that are sensitive to solvents. It is fast drying with excellent corrosion resistance. It can be used in wet-on-wet and sandable modes.

Epoxy Primer Filler may be applied directly to properly prepared bare steel, zinc coated steels, galvanised steel, aluminium, sound original paintwork, and polyester bodyfillers. It may be directly overcoated with any Deltron 2K Primers, Progress UHS topcoat or Envirobase.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE - SANDING

Substrate

Bare steel Galvanised steel Zintec Aluminium and alloys Electropaint Aged painted surfaces GRP , Fibre-Glass Polyester filler

Preparation

P80 – 120 (dry) P400 (dry) Scotchbrite P280-320(dry) P280/320 (dry) / P600 (wet) P280/320 (dry) / P280 - 320 (wet) P320 (dry) P80 - P120 (dry) finish with P180 (dry)


Before any preparation work, wash all surfaces to be painted with soap and water. Rinse and allow to dry before degreasing with a suitable PPG substrate cleaner: Ensure all substrates are thoroughly cleaned and dried before and after each stage of the preparation work. Always wipe substrate cleaner off the panel surface immediately, using a clean, dry cloth. Please see Deltron Cleaners (RLD63V) Technical Data Sheet for appropriate substrate cleaning and degreasing products.

Waterborne Epoxy Primer D8012 Hardener for Waterborne Epoxy Primer D8212


Page 2

MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratios by volume:

D8012 8 parts D8212 1 parts Thinner 2 - 3 parts

2. Mixing Ratios by weight:

D8012 110 g D8212 10 g Thinner 20 – 30 g Notes: Mix primer and hardener until homogeneous, before addition of Thinner. After adding Thinner, mix again. An induction period of 10 minutes after mixing is necessary before use. T494 thinner should be used with this Primer, or T495 in conditions of high temperature (above 35°C).

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 2 hours.

Note: Material does not gel, but must not be used more than 2 hours after mixing.

Spray viscosity at 20°C: 30 - 35 seconds DIN4

APPLICATION AND FLASH-OFF Spraygun set-up 1.3 - 1.4 mm Fluid Tip



10 - 15 minutes or until matt

Thin coats may be dried with an air blower

DRYING TIMES

- Dust free


10 - 15 minutes or when matt, can be gently dried with

an air blower

Can be gently dry de-nibbed after 20 minutes

Total dry film build:

15 - 20 microns


Page 3

REPAIR AND RECOATING - Spot Primer for Sensitive Substrates

Sanding: Denib around overspray edge. Use fine grade paper, or sponge backed abrasive P1200 or finer

Overcoat / Re-coat time:

After drying, by blowing with air, overcoat when matt

Directly Overcoat with: Deltron Progress UHS Topcoats, Envirobase or

Deltron Primers.

SANDABLE MODE - MIXING AND APPLICATION Mixing Ratios By Volume By Weight

D8012 8 parts 110 g D8212 1 part 10 g Thinner 1 part 10 g Notes: Mix primer and hardener until homogeneous, before addition of Thinner. After adding Thinner, mix again. An induction period of 10 minutes after mixing is necessary before use. T494 thinner should be used with this Primer, or T495 in conditions of high temperature (above 35°C).


Potlife at 20°C: 1.5 hours. Note: Material does not gel, but must not be used more than 1.5 hours after mixing. Spraygun set-up 1.6 - 1.8 mm Fluid Tip




Flash-off before bake at 20°C:


Dry to sand

30 minutes at 60°C (metal temperature)


100 - 150 microns


Page 4


Use only the D8212 hardener recommended on this datasheet.

The pot life of this product is about 2 hours. Be aware that this product does not gel, therefore care should be taken NOT to use after 2 hours. Storage: Between +5°C and 35°C



Page 5

Global at a Glance D8012 WATERBORNE EPOXY PRIMER

Mixing by volume

With D8212 Hardener and Thinner - 8 : 1 : 2 - 3 Mixing by Weight D8012 - 110g : D8212 - 10g : Thinner - 20 / 30g

Pot Life at 20°C - 2 hours maximum.

. Application viscosity 30 - 35 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Sizes 1.3 - 1.4 mm Fluid Tip Number of Coats 2 maximum Drying Times Dust Free - 10 - 15 minutes or until matt, can be gently dried with an air blower.

Through dry at 20°C Can be gently dry de-nibbed after 20 minutes

Note: For details on use as a higher build sandable primer see Sandable Mode section on page 3.


Page 6

VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.c) in ready to use form is max. 540g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 250g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.

HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480 Copyright ©2009 PPG Industries, all rights reserved



Page 1


Product Information

DELFLEET Rapid Repair System PRODUCTS Delfleet High Build Primer Surfacers F392 / F3976 Delfleet UHS Hardener Fast F3279 Delfleet UHS Accelerated Thinner F3307 Delfleet UHS Topcoat Binder F3112 Delfleet UHS Hardener- Medium F3278 Delfleet UHS Accelerated Thinner F3307

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Delfleet Rapid Repair system is for use with F392 / F3976 High Build primer surfacers and Delfleet UHS topcoats. This will produce a VOC compliant process with greatly reduced drying times, under force dry conditions, whilst retaining finishes of outstanding gloss and durability, which fully meets the highest standard demanded by fleet operators.

In Ready for use form the primers have a VOC below 540 g/l and the topcoats below 420 g/l.


Page 2


Preparation:

Primer Surfacer By volume

F392/3976 7 F3279 1 F3307 1

Delfleet UHS By volume

F3112 3 F3278 1 F3307 0.5


20 minutes 1 hour

Viscosity

Primer Surfacer

29-35 sec. DIN4/20ºC)

Delfleet UHS Topcoat

17-25 sec. DIN4/20ºC)

Gun set-up:

1.4-1.8 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

1.4-1.8 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

Number of coats: 2 - 3 2

20ºC Flash off: Between

coats

Before bake

10-15 mins.

15-30 mins.

10-15 mins.

15-20 mins.

20 C Dust free:

20 C Through dry

60ºC Bake

(metal temp.)

IR Medium Wave

HVLP

10-15 mins.

2 Hours

15 - 20 mins.

15 mins.

HVLP

40-60 mins.

6 Hours

20-25 mins.

15 mins.

Dry film

thickness:

Minimum

Maximum Theoretical coverage:

50 µm

125µm

11m2/l

50 µm

75µm

11m2/l



Page 3

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS The drying times quoted are approximate times and will vary depending upon drying conditions and film thickness. Poor ventilation, temperatures below 20°C and excessive film thickness will extend drying times. When using these combinations of hardener / thinner the pot life of the mixed materials are greatly reduced. Therefore the paint should be mixed and used immediately.


The EU limit for this product (product category:IIB.d) in ready for use form is max. 420g/l of VOC(Delfleet UHS

topcoat) and 540 g/l (Delfleet Primer Surfacer)

HEALTH AND SAFETY




Page 1


Product Information

DELFLEET Rapid Repair System PRODUCTS Delfleet High Build Primer Surfacers F392 / F3976 Delfleet UHS Hardener Fast F3274 Delfleet UHS Accelerated Thinner F3307 Delfleet UHS Topcoat Binders F3112 / F3113 Delfleet UHS Hardener- Medium F3278 Delfleet UHS Accelerated Thinner F3307

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Delfleet Rapid Repair system is for use with F392 / F3976 High Build primer surfacers and Delfleet UHS topcoats. This will produce a VOC compliant process with greatly reduced drying times, under force dry conditions, whilst retaining finishes of outstanding gloss and durability, which fully meets the highest standard demanded by fleet operators.

In Ready for use form the primers have a VOC below 540 g/l and the topcoats below 420 g/l.


Page 2


Preparation:

Primer Surfacer By volume

F392/3976 7 F3274 1 F3307 1

Delfleet UHS By volume

F3112 / 3 3 F3278 1 F3307 0.5


20 minutes 1 hour

Viscosity

Primer Surfacer

29-35 sec. DIN4/20ºC)

Delfleet UHS Topcoat

17-25 sec. DIN4/20ºC)

Gun set-up:

1.4-1.8 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

1.4-1.8 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

Number of coats: 2 - 3 2

20ºC Flash off: Between

coats

Before bake

10-15 mins.

15-30 mins.

10-15 mins.

15-20 mins.

20 C Dust free:

20 C Through dry

60ºC Bake

(metal temp.)

IR Medium Wave

HVLP

10-15 mins.

2 Hours

15 - 20 mins.

15 mins.

HVLP

40-60 mins.

6 Hours

20-25 mins.

15 mins.

Dry film

thickness:

Minimum

Maximum Theoretical coverage:

50 µm

125µm

11m2/l

50 µm

75µm

11m2/l



Page 3

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS The drying times quoted are approximate times and will vary depending upon drying conditions and film thickness. Poor ventilation, temperatures below 20°C and excessive film thickness will extend drying times. When using these combinations of hardener / thinner the pot life of the mixed materials are greatly reduced. Therefore the paint should be mixed and used immediately.


The EU limit for this product (product category:IIB.d) in ready for use form is max. 420g/l of

VOC(Delfleet UHS topcoat) and 540 g/l (Delfleet Primer Surfacer)

HEALTH AND SAFETY




Page 1

D8434 - Plastic Substrate Cleaner D846 - DX103 Antistatic Agent for Plastics

GLOBAL REFINISH

SYSTEM

August 2008

Product Information DELTRON CLEANING AND PREPARATION OF PLASTIC SUBSTRATES PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The PPG Plastic Painting System gives a range of products for the successful painting of all paintable plastic substrates*, from cleaning and preparation through to texturing and topcoating. Thorough preparation and cleaning are essential for the successful refinishing of plastic parts. The plastic cleaning and preparation system is designed to produce the best performance from the primer and topcoat systems. D8434 – Plastic Substrate Cleaner is a detergent cleaner for removing all types of contaminants (e.g. mould release agents and traffic film) as a step in the preparatory process to ensure excellent adhesion of subsequent coatings.

D846 – DX103 Antistatic Agent for Plastics is a specially designed alcoholic blend of solvents formulated to treat plastic surfaces without damaging them and to prevent the build up of static, ensuring a dust free finish.

* Note ; Some grades of PE are considered unpaintable, and some primers are not suitable for use on very solvent sensitive substrates such as Polystyrene (PS). See relevant PDS for details.


Page 2

FOR USE ON BARE PLASTIC SUBSTRATES

STEP ONE – D8434 Plastic Substrate Cleaner MIXING RATIO

Mixing Ratios by volume: General Solvent Sensitive Plastics Plastics

D8434 1 part 1 part Water 1 part 2 parts

APPLICATION Apply with Scotch-Brite™ Grey Ultrafine, lightly scuffing the surface. Rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. If water beads on rinsing, repeat the process. STEP TWO – D846 Antistatic Agent for Plastics APPLICATION Apply to the whole of the plastic part to be painted. Use one clean lint free cloth for application and one for wiping off.

NOTE: DO NOT APPLY D846, ANTISTATIC AGENT FOR PLASTICS ON SOLVENT SENSITIVE PLASTICS


Page 3

VOC INFORMATION D8434 - Plastic Substrate Cleaner D846 - DX193 Antistatic Agent for Plastics The EU limit value for these products (product category: IIB.a) in ready to use form is max. 850g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of these products in ready to use form is max. 850g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of these products may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.





Page 1 of 6

GLOBAL REFINISH

SYSTEM

August 2009

Product Information Deltron D893 PRODUCTS Deltron Performance Clear D893 Deltron HS Hardener D897 Deltron MS Hardeners D803, D841 Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869 Deltron DG Fadeout Thinner D868 For matt, satin and textured finishes or painting of flexible substrates: Deltron Matting Base D759 to create a matt or satin appearance Deltron Plasticiser D814 to plasticise finishes over a flexible substrate Deltron Matt Flexibiliser D819 to create a matt or satin appearance over a flexible substrate Deltron Texture Additive D843 to create a fine textured ‘suede’ effect Deltron Leather Grain Additive D844 to create a coarser, more pronounced textured finish

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deltron Performance Clear is a 2K acrylic urethane clearcoat for the repairing & repainting of original finishes in clearcoat over a single or multistage colour basecoat system.

D893 is designed for use over Deltron BC or Envirobase colour.

Performance Clear


Page 2 of 6

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Deltron D893 Clear must be applied on top of a clean and dust free Deltron Basecoat or Envirobase. The use of a tack rag is recommended to remove dust from the Basecoat or Envirobase film.

MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratios with MS Hardeners D803 / D841

By Volume D893 3 parts MS Hardener* 1 parts Thinner 0,5 parts

2. Mixing Ratios with HS Hardeners: D897

By Volume D893 4 parts HS Hardener* 1 parts Thinner* 0,5 parts *Choose Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature and system

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Temperature MS Hardener Thinner HS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D803 Medium D808 - - 18°C - 25°C D841 Slow D807 D897 D807 Over 25°C D841 Slow D812** D897 D812** ** For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) the use of Very Slow Thinner D869 is recommended

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 1 hour with D841 45 minutes with D897 Spray viscosity at 20°C: 16 -19 seconds DIN4


Page 3 of 6

APPLICATION AND FLASH OFF Spraygun set-up: 1.3 - 1.6 mm

MS System

1 medium coat ↓

10 min flash-off ↓

1 full coat ↓

5 - 10 min flash-off ↓

Low-bake / IR / air dry

HS System 1 mist coat

↓ no flash-off

↓ 1 full coat

↓ no flash-off

↓ Low-bake / IR / air dry

DRYING TIMES

Drying times: ***

- Dust free at 20 °C

- Through dry at 20 °C

- Through dry at 70°C


20 - 25 minutes

8 hours

20 minutes

10 minutes (dependent on colour of basecoat – darker colours require less time)

*** Stoving times are for quoted metal temperature. Additional time should be allowed in the stoving schedule to allow metal to reach recommended temperature.

Total dry film build: 50 - 60 µm Theoretical coverage: 7 m²/L



Sanding: Essential before recoating to ensure good adhesion P800 (wet) P400 - P500 (dry)



- Air dry at 20°C

After cooling

Minimum 12 hours Overcoat with: PPG 2K Primers, Envirobase, Deltron GRS Topcoats


Page 4 of 6

MATT, SATIN AND TEXTURED FINISHES PAINTING OF FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish with Deltron D893 HS clear, it is necessary to include matt, flex or texture additives in the mix. Additives are also required when applying D893 over a flexible substrate (typically plastics). The additives required and the appropriate volume and weight mix ratios are indicated in microfiches if relevant or in the tables below.

Note : Do not use HS hardeners for matt, semi-matt and texture finishes.

Substrate Appearance D893 D759 D843 D844 D814 D819 MS hardeners

Thinner

RIGID Satin 383g 673g - - - - 777g 952g

Matt 239g 602g - - - - 731g 951g

Matt Textured 230g - 579g - - - 662g 942g

Leather Grain 348g - - 607g - - 701g 940g

FLEXIBLE Satin 294g 518g - - - 678g 837g 972g

Matt 225g 510g - - - 633g 754g 960g

Matt Textured 191g - 482g - - 587g 690g 953g

Leather Grain 273g - - 477g - 626g 774g 962g

SPOT REPAIR PROCEDURE - Apply Deltron D893 HS Clear according to the 'Application, Flash-Off and Drying' section above.

- Leave to flash-off for 10 minutes/20°C after the 2nd coat.

- A suitable quantity of activated and thinned D893 HS Clear should then be reduced with Deltron DG Fade-Out Thinner D868 at a ratio of 1:3 (1 part activated and thinned Clear to 3 parts D868).

- Apply this 1:3 mix over the repair area, using a reduced gun pressure to minimize overspray. Spray from the outside of the repair inwards, covering an area that extends beyond the edge of the initial application.

- If necessary, repeat the previous step using D868 neat.

- After force dry or IR, buff the repair edges.

POLISHING

Low bake or IR force drying:


Air drying at 20°C: Minimum overnight


Page 5 of 6

Global at a Glance D893 GRS Deltron Low VOC Performance Clear

Mixing by volume

With MS Hardeners D803/841 - 3:1:0,5 With HS Hardeners D897 - 4:1:0,5 Pot Life at 20°C: 45 minutes to 1 hour depending on Hardener choice Hardener / Thinner Selection

Up to 18°C D803 MS Hardener D808 Fast thinner

18 - 25°C D841 MS Hardener or D897 HS Hardener D807 Thinner Over 25°C D841 MS Hardener or D897 HS Hardener D812 Slow thinner


Application viscosity 16- 19 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.3 - 1.6 mm fluid tip Number of Coats MS System - 1 medium coat, 5 minute flash off, followed by 1 full coat HS System - 1 light coat, immediately followed by 1 full coat Drying Times

10 minutes flash off before stoving for MS system, No flash off for HS system

Dust Free - 20 - 25 minutes Through dry at 20°C - 8 hours Through dry at 70°C - 20 minutes


RLD243V


January 2009

Product Information D8407 WB FLATTING PASTE

PRODUCT WB Flatting Paste D8407

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION D8407 is a water-based abrasive, which provides a fast and effective method of preparing surfaces for repainting particularly for fade-out repairs. It is silicone and wax-free, and any residue is easily washed off with water.


RLD243V

PREPARATION PROCESS

1. Ensure the whole area to be repaired has been thoroughly pre-cleaned. 2. Apply the D8407 WB Flatting Paste onto a Scotch-Brite abrasive pad

(Ultrafine Grey or equivalent). 3. Use the Paste and Scotch-Brite pad with water to ‘key’ or ‘flat’ the surface to be painted. 4. Wash off all residues with clean water and dry thoroughly with a clean cloth.

The surface should now have a uniformly matt appearance. Note: Failure to remove all residues could affect the adhesion of subsequent paint layers.

5. Wipe the area to be repaired with a suitable Precleaner before applying paint. 6. Tak off the area to be painted. 7. Apply topcoat.

Refer to Aerosol Fade Out Thinner – Rapid Blender TDS (RLD199V).





Page 1


Product Information

DELFLEET A689 PRODUCT Delfleet Pot Life Stabiliser A689

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Some Delfleet 2K materials have short potlives when used at high temperatures. A689 potlife stabiliser is designed to help to overcome this problem. The use of a stabiliser will produce potlife of approximately twice that quoted on the datasheet.

PREPARATION AND APPLICATION With Delfleet 280, 350 and UHS topcoats -A689 should be used as an addition of 30g per mixed litre of topcoat. This ratio can also be used with Delfleet medium or high solids topcoats, or Delfleet 2K urethane primers. With Delfleet UHS Thinners – Pot life stabiliser is incorporated into the F3305/7/8 thinners, so when these thinners are used additions of A689 are not recommended.

HEALTH AND SAFETY




Page 1 of 7


June 2011

Product Information D8501 D8505 D8507 2K Primer DP4000

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION DP4000, designed on the latest primer technology, can be used to optimise the priming process when used in combination with Envirobase High Performance and Deltron Progress UHS. It is designed to deliver a high quality final appearance through a non sand process that is equivalent to a sanded primer. Excellent application, very smooth flow and superb holdout properties are at the core of this product’s performance. Due to the excellent adhesion characteristics of DP4000, no sanding of sound OE electrocoat is required, providing a very fast new panel process. DP4000 can be recoated directly after 15 minutes, or for up to 5 days with no sanding, so new parts can be primed in batches in advance with minimal preparation, and can be held ready for the topcoating process with the rest of the vehicle. The strong adhesion and anti-corrosion characteristics mean that small rub throughs on electrocoated panels do not require the use of an etch primer before DP4000 is applied.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE- SANDING

DP4000 can be applied over a wide range of substrates including:

- Well cleaned unsanded Electrocoat. - Bare steel areas up to 10cm diameter without the need for an Etch Primer - Galvanised Steel for rub throughs up to 10cm maximum diameter - Zintec for rub throughs up to 10cm maximum diameter - Aluminium and alloys for rub throughs up to 10cm maximum diameter - Aged painted and original surfaces sanded with P320 or finer - GRP, Fibreglass P120/ P240/P320 - Polyester Filler P120/ P240/P320

Note: A 2-pack Etch Primer should be applied prior to the application of DP4000 for areas of bare metal above 10cm diameter, area's particularly vulnerable to corrosion or for OEM warranty standard corrosion performance.

PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE – DEGREASING Before any preparation work, wash all surfaces to be painted with soap and water. Rinse and allow to dry before degreasing with a suitable PPG substrate cleaner. Ensure all substrates are thoroughly cleaned and dried before and after each stage of the preparation work. Always wipe substrate cleaner off the panel surface immediately, using a clean dry cloth.

D8501 2K primer DP4000 White G1 D8505 2K primer DP4000 Grey G5 D8507 2K primer DP4000 Dark Grey G7 D8238 HS Fast Hardener D8239 HS Slow Hardener D8715 Productive Thinner

These products are for professional use only.

RLD249V Page 2 of 7

MIXING RATIOS Mixing Ratios By Volume:

2K Primer DP4000 2 Hardener 1 2K Thinner 0.5

Recommended Hardeners: D8238 / D8239 PPG Recommended Thinners: D8715 (for optimum performance at 20 - 25°C) D866 / D807 / D812 or D8718 / D8719


Potlife at 20°C: 1 hour.


HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION Temperature HS Hardener Thinner Below 25ºC D8238 D8715

25ºC - 30ºC D8238 D866 or D807 or D8718 Thinner

Over 30ºC D8239 D812 or D8719 Slow Thinner


Spraygun set-up: 1.2 -1.3mm Spray pressure: See spraygun manufacturers information

Number of coats: Apply 1 full single coat or 1 light + 1 full to give a film thickness of 25-35 microns (1.0 - 1.4 thou.) Apply to achieve an even finish. Do not apply heavy coats.

Flash-off at 20°C:

Before topcoat 15 minutes


RLD249V Page 3 of 7

DRYING TIMES

- Ready for topcoat - Scotch brite and

preclean - Sand - Dry to sand at 60°C - Dry to sand with Infra

Red (Medium Wave)

- For use with Gas/IR please use slowest Hardener and Thinner options.

15 minutes 3 days > 5 days 30 minutes 5 min flash 10 min. cure 50 cm at 110°C

OVERCOATING

Overcoat / Re-coat time:

Minimum: 15 minutes. Maximum: 5 Days without sanding.

Preclean before topcoating if left more than 8 hours.

Light denibbing and precleaning is recommended if this primer is left more than 3 days before topcoating.

If used for Spot repair, it is recommended that this primer should be force dried either at 60°C for 30 minutes or Infra Red dried. Once cool sand with P400 / 500 before overcoating.

Overcoat with:

Deltron Progress UHS, Envirobase HP

Normally DP4000 does not require flatting and can be directly topcoated. If some dirt inclusion occurs, light flatting/denibbing can be carried out after the first coat of Envirobase High Performance using P800 with foam pad otherwise after force drying for any other need.


RLD249V Page 4 of 7

PROCESSING ALTERNATIVES DP4000 is especially useful for painting batches of small parts ready for the topcoating process. The excellent flow characteristics allow the OE quality finish to be replicated without sanding. DP4000 can be topcoated using the following alternatives: - Flashed off 15 minutes or any time same day without sanding - Recoated unsanded for up to 5 days.

(light denibbing and precleaning is required after overnight dry to prevent any workshop contamination from the environment from affecting the topcoat performance).

DP4000 CAN BE USED IN PRIMER FILLER MODE USING THE FOLLOWING RECOMMENDATIONS Mix and use the gun set up as recommended in the main Process note. Apply 1 light + 2 full coats This gives a film thickness of approximately 100-110 microns Bake for 30 minutes at 60°C metal temperature. IR medium wave 5 min flash off, followed by a 10 min cure time. IR/GAS 50 cm 110°C. After cooling dry sand with P400 or finer

EQUIPMENT CLEANING After use, clean all equipment thoroughly with suitable cleaning solvent or thinner.

PAINTING PLASTICS DP4000 can be applied directly over well prepared and cleaned ABS, NORYL, PC/PBT, LEXAN, PUR and SMC, as well as sanded and pre-primed bumpers. Large bare plastic sections or rub through areas on bumpers, e.g. PP, TPO, PP/EPDM should be primed first with a light coat of D820 Plastic Primer, and flashed off 10 minutes before the application of DP4000.


RLD249V Page 5 of 7

Global at a Glance DP4000 2K PRIMER DP4000

Mixing ratio by volume

2K Primer DP4000 2:1:0,5

Pot Life at 20°C. 60 minutes


Temperature HS Hardener Thinner

Below 25ºC D8238 D8715

25ºC - 30ºC D8238 D866 or D807 or D8718 Thinner

Over 30ºC D8239 D812 or D8719 Slow Thinner

Application Parameters DIN 4 @ 20°C 16 – 18 Seconds Spraygun Sizes 1.2 – 1.3 mm fluid tip Gravity gun recommended Number of Coats 1 Full single coat or *1 visit application

Apply to achieve an even finish. Do not apply heavy coats..

Drying Times

Dry to topcoat 15 minutes

Topcoats This primer may be overcoated with Deltron Progress UHS direct gloss

or Envirobase HP basecoat. (See the relevant topcoat TDS)

* 1 light followed by 1 full


RLD249V Page 6 of 7

MIXING RATIOS FOR GREYMATIC SHADES

% by weight G1 G3 G5 G6 G7

D8501 100 75 -- -- --

D8505 -- 25 100 48 --

D8507 -- -- -- 52 100

MIXING BY WEIGHT Where a specific volume of primer is required, this may be best achieved by weight mixing using the guidelines below. The tables show weights for 2/1/0,5 mixing ratios. WEIGHT ACTIVATION: Weights are in grams & cumulative. Do not tare the balance between additions.

2 / 1 / 0.5 MIXING RATIO

Target Paint Volume (L) 0.20 L 0.40 L 0.60 L 0.80 L 1.00 L

Primer 165 330 495 660 826 HS Hardeners 222 444 666 887 1109 Thinner D866 / D807 / D812 248 497 745 993 1242

WEIGHT ACTIVATION: Weights are in grams & cumulative. Do not tare the balance between additions.

2 / 1 / 0.5 MIXING RATIO

Target Paint Volume (L) 0.20 L 0.40 L 0.60 L 0.80 L 1.00 L

Primer 165 330 495 660 826 HS Hardeners 222 444 666 887 1109 D 87** Thinners 245 490 736 981 1226


RLD249V Page 7 of 7

VOC INFORMATION The EU limit value for this product (product category: IIB.c) in ready to use form is max. 540g/litre of VOC. The VOC content of this product in ready to use form is max. 540g/litre. Depending on the chosen mode of use, the actual ready to use VOC of this product may be lower than that specified by the EU Directive code.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com


h

hhh



Page 1 of 7


October 2010

Product Information GRS Deltron Low Gloss Clearcoat - D8113/D8122 Mix (Approx. 20 – 30% Gloss @ 60°)

PRODUCTS Deltron Matt Clearcoat D8113 Deltron CeramiClearTM D8122 Deltron MS Hardeners D841, D861 Deltron Thinners D807, D812, D869

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The mix of D8113 and D8122 Clearcoats is designed for use over Envirobase or Deltron basecoats. Deltron basecoat must only be used for repair work not controlled by EU Directive 2004/42.

Deltron Low Gloss Clearcoat Mix is a versatile 2K acrylic urethane clearcoat designed for the specialised repairs of vehicles or areas of vehicles originally finished with low gloss clearcoat over a single or multistage colour basecoat system (e.g. Mercedes full body Matt Finish). To allow for the normal gloss variations - due to colour, model, postion of repair on vehicle etc., the actual mix of the two Clearcoats can be varied to match the vehicle to be repaired.

The D8113/D8122 Mix may be used over rigid plastics without the need for special additives.

D8113/D8122 Mix Clearcoat can be used with Deltron MS hardeners D841 / D861.

D8113 Matt Clearcoat D8122 CeramiclearTM


Page 2 of 7


The Deltron D8113/D8122 Mix Clearcoat must be applied on top of a clean and dust-free basecoat. The light use of a tack cloth is recommended after the basecoat has flashed off. Care should be taken to avoid dirt inclusion at all stages. Rectification of dirt inclusion in Matt or Low Gloss finishes is not possible after the final coat of clearcoat.

D8113/D8122 MIX RATIOS To allow for normal variations in the gloss level, depending on colour, model, position of repair on vehicle, it is possible to mix the D8113 and D8122 as follows to match the required gloss for a particular repair. Lower Gloss Option Higher Gloss Option By Weight By Weight D8113 90 85 D8122 10 15 The resulting mix is then activated and thinned as below. Note: It is strongly recommended that test panels are produced to check for colour and gloss level against the vehicle to be repaired.

MIXING RATIO Mixing ratios with MS Hardeners D841 / D861 By Volume By Weight D8113 / D8122 Mix 4 volumes See table, Page 4 MS Hardener* 1 volume Thinner* 1.2 volumes

• Choose MS Hardener / Thinner according to application temperature *

• As with all high solids products, cold ready for use paint temperatures can lead to more difficult application and overspray absorption.

HARDENER SELECTION System MS Hardener Bake Schedule For use at Temperatures D841 Medium 30 minutes @ 60°C 18 - 30°C For use on large areas and/or D861 Slow 40 minutes @ 60°C temperatures above 30°C Note: The choice of thinner depends upon size of area to be painted.


Page 3 of 7

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 2 hours with D841 hardener Spray viscosity at 20°C 16 - 18 seconds DIN4.


Spraygun set-up: 1.2 - 1.4 mm Conventional Two/Three Coat Process

Application Apply 2 - 3 single coats to give 50 - 60 microns dry film build.

Flash off between spray coats Minimum 15 minutes or until fully and evenly matt over the whole repair area.*

Flash off before bake or IR dry Minimum 15 minutes or until fully and evenly matt over the whole repair area.*

*Note: Allowing the Clearcoat Mix to flash off fully between coats and before bake is important to achieve an even appearance and gloss level over the whole area.

DRYING TIMES

- Dust free time at 20°C 30 minutes with D841,

- Dry to handle at 20°C 3 hours with D841

- Through dry at 20°C 12 hours with D841

- Through dry at 60°C* 30 minutes with D841,

40 minutes with D861



. Total dry film build: Theoretical coverage:

50 – 60 µm



Page 4 of 7



- grade wet P800



After cooling



WEIGHT MIX TABLE FOR D8113

Target

Volume of RFU Paint required (Litres)

Weight Clearcoat

D8113/D8122 Mix (g)

Weight MS Hardeners

D841/D861 (g)

Weight D807, D812 or D869

Thinner (g)


0.10 L 67g 83g 100g

0.20 L 134g 167g 201g

0.25 L 167g 209g 251g

0.33 L 221g 275g 331g

0.50 L 334g 417g 502g

0.75 L 501g 626g 753g

1.00 L 668g 834g 1004g

1.50 L 1003g 1251g 1506g

2.00 L 1337g 1668g 2008g

2.50 L 1671g 2085g 2509g


Page 5 of 7

Global at a Glance D8113/D8122 Mix GRS Deltron Low Gloss Clearcoat Mixing by volume With MS Hardener 4 : 1 : 1.2

Pot Life at 20°C Using D841 2 hours Hardener Selection

For application temperatures D841 Medium Hardener 18 - 30°C

For application on large areas D861 Slow Hardener or temperatures above 30°C

Application Viscosity 16 - 18 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.2 - 1.4 mm fluid tip Number of Coats Conventional -

2/3 single coats, flash-off until fully matt between coats. Flash off until fully matt before baking.

Drying Times Dust free at 20°C 30 minutes with D841,

Through dry at 60°C 30 minutes with D841 40 minutes with D861


Page 6 of 7

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS The Gloss levels achieved with this clear may vary depending upon film thickness and application. Low film thickness and dry application will give a Low Gloss. High film thickness and wet application will give a higher gloss level. It is recommended that this clear be used for complete panel repair only. To remove minor dirt inclusions in the final finish, the repair should be fully dried, de-nibbed after cooling and one further coat of the Clearcoat Mix applied. Care should be taken to avoid too high clearcoat film thicknesses because the final colour could be affected. In this situation, the repair will require sanding and recoating with Basecoat and Clearcoat. Dirt removal from the final Matt Finish is not possible.

GENERAL CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF MATT FINISHES The following guidance on Care and Cleaning of matt finish vehicles is aimed at the car owner, and applies to both the OE and the repair finish. Particular care must be taken with Matt Finishes to maintain an original even Matt effect. Guidance for the car owner on maintaining the even matt effect over time

1. In order to keep the Matt surface effect, the use of paint cleaner, abrasives or polishes and wax polishes must be avoided. The vehicle must not be polished.

2. Polishing will lead to a higher, uneven gloss effect.

3. Cleaning/Polishing with unsuitable materials could lead to increased gloss.

4. Automated car washing machines should be avoided. The preferred car washing method

is by hand with a soft sponge, neutral soap and lots of water. Too frequent car washing could over a period of time lead to increased and inconsistent gloss levels across a car panel. Washing under direct sunlight should be avoided.

5. Insects and bird residues should be removed immediately. The residues should be soaked in water to soften and/or removed carefully with a high pressure cleaning equipment. In the case of strongly adhered residues, a spray on insect remover should be used prior to washing.



Page 7 of 7

HEALTH AND SAFETY These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information please refer to the material Safety Data Sheet, also available at: www.ppgrefinish.com PPG Industries (UK) Limited. Auto Refinish Customer Service and Sales Group, Needham Road, Stowmarket, Suffolk. IP14 2AD, England. Tel: 01449 771775 Fax: 01449 773480




Page 1 of 8


January 2012

Product Information GRS Deltron Matt Clearcoat System

PRODUCTS

Deltron Matt Clearcoat D8115 Deltron Semi Gloss Clearcoat D8117 Deltron HS Hardeners D8237, D8238, D8239 Deltron Thinners D812, D869 Deltron Low VOC Thinners D8718, D8719

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The Clearcoats D8115 (Matt) and D8117 (Semi-Gloss) are designed for use over Envirobase High Performance basecoats.

Deltron Matt Clearcoat System consists of two versatile 2K acrylic urethane clearcoats designed to reproduce a range of low gloss levels for the specialised repairs of vehicles or areas of vehicles originally finished with a low gloss clearcoat over a single or multistage colour basecoat system (e.g. Mercedes full body Matt Finish). To allow for the normal gloss variations - due to colour, model, position of repair on vehicle etc., the actual mix of the two Clearcoats can be varied to match the vehicle to be repaired.

The D8115 / D8117 or mixes of the two may be used over rigid plastics without the need for special additives.

D8115 Matt Clearcoat D8117 Semi-Gloss Clearcoat


Page 2 of 8


When masking a repair, care should be taken to minimize direct contact of masking tape onto the original Matt finish. Where it is necessary to use masking tape directly on the original finish, the tape must be removed before baking to avoid marking of the original which may not recover. The Deltron D8115 / D8117 Clearcoats must be applied on top of a clean and dust-free basecoat. The light use of a tack cloth is recommended after the basecoat has flashed off. Care should be taken to avoid dirt inclusion at all stages. Rectification of dirt inclusion in Matt or Low Gloss finishes is not possible after the final coat of clearcoat.

D8115 / D8117 MIX RATIOS

To allow for normal variations in the gloss level, depending on colour, model, position of repair on vehicle, it is possible to mix the D8115 and D8117 together in any ratio to match the required gloss for a particular repair. The % ratio’s quoted below are the best start point for the 5 gloss level ranges.

Gloss Level FC01 FC02 FC03 FC04 FC05

Matt e.g. Lamborghini full body Matt Finish

Low Gloss e.g. Mercedes, Smart, BMW, Fiat full body Matt finishes

Semi Gloss e.g. Older Mercedes Plastic side mouldings

Clearcoat Percentage Parts by Weight (%)

D8115 100 85 70 40 0

D8117 0 15 30 60 100

The resulting mix is then activated and thinned as below. Note: Test panels MUST be produced using the intended hardener/thinner/ratio/spraygun combination to check for colour and gloss level against the vehicle to be repaired. D8718 Thinners are recommended to only be used on small areas or components (Mirror covers etc.)

* HARDENER / THINNER / MIX RATIO SELECTION Smaller areas / Verticals / Higher Gloss Larger Areas / Horizontals / Lower Gloss Below 25°C Above 25°C Smaller Spraygun tip size Larger Spraygun tip size Faster Hardener/Thinner Slower Hardener/Thinner


Page 3 of 8

MIXING RATIO

Mixing ratios with MS Hardeners D8237 / D8238 / D8239 By Volume By Weight D8115 / D8117 3 volumes See table, Page 5 Hardener* 1 volume Thinner* 1.5 volumes

* Choose HS Hardener / Thinner according to guidance on previous page.

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Potlife at 20°C: 1 - 2 hours depending on hardener/thinner Spray viscosity at 20°C 15 seconds DIN4.

APPLICATION AND FLASH-OFF


Application 1 Full single coat Flash off until evenly Matt all over + 1 Full single coat followed immediately by a lighter (½ coat) cross coat. Flash off until evenly Matt all over before baking.

Flash off between spray coats

Minimum 15 - 30 minutes or until fully and evenly matt over the whole repair area.*

Flash off before bake or IR dry

Minimum 15 - 30 minutes or until fully and evenly matt over the whole repair area.*

*Note: Allowing the Clearcoat Mix to flash off fully between coats and before bake is important to achieve an even appearance and gloss level over the whole area. The actual flash off times will depend on the hardener/thinner combination required to achieve the correct gloss effect and could vary between 10 – 45 minutes.


Page 4 of 8

DRYING TIMES

Through dry at 60°C* 30 minutes with D8237 / D8238,

40 minutes with D8239 Through dry at IR 8 - 15 minutes (depending upon colour) (medium wave)



45 – 55 µm



- grade wet P800



After cooling


Overcoat with: Deltron primers Envirobase High Performance Deltron topcoats


Page 5 of 8

WEIGHT MIX TABLES FOR D8115 / D8117

GUIDELINES FOR WEIGHT MIXING Where a specific volume of clearcoat mix is required, this may be best achieved by weight mixing, using the guidelines below. The weights are cumulative - please do NOT tare the balance between additions.


@ 3/1/1.5

Weight Clearcoat

D8115/D8117 or Blends

Weight HS Hardener

D8237/D8238/D8239

Weight Thinner D812/D869


0.10 L 57g 75g 99g

0.20 L 113g 150g 197g

0.25 L 142g 187g 246g

0.33 L 187g 247g 325g

0.50 L

284g 374g 493g

0.75 L 425g 561g 739g

1.00 L

567g 748g 985g

1.50 L

851g 1122g 1478g

2.00 L

1135g 1496g 1971g

2.50 L 1418g 1870g 2464g


@ 3/1/1.5

Weight Clearcoat

D8115/D8117 or Blends

Weight HS Hardener

D8237/D8238/D8239

Weight Thinner D8718/D8719


0.10 L 57g 75g 97g

0.20 L 113g 150g 194g

0.25 L 142g 187g 243g

0.33 L 187g 247g 321g

0.50 L

284g 374g 486g

0.75 L 425g 561g 729g

1.00 L

567g 748g 972g

1.50 L

851g 1122g 1458g

2.00 L

1135g 1496g 1944g

2.50 L 1418g 1870g 2430g


Page 6 of 8

REPAIR OF FULL BODY MATT FINISHES BLENDING THE WB BASECOAT

Fading out of the Matt Clearcoat itself is not possible because the resulting clearcoat edge cannot be successfully polished to give an invisible repair. However, depending on the colour (Lighter shades) and the effect of the OEM clearcoat, the WB basecoat layer can be faded out using the steps listed below, followed by Matt clearcoating to the next convenient panel edge.

Note: - For darker colours (especially black) depending on the impact of the OEM matt clearcoat on the overall colour match, it is possible that the repair clearcoat combined with the OEM clearcoat could affect the colour compared to the next panel. In such cases this blending technique may not be possible and complete panel repair with basecoat and clearcoat is a more practical option.

1. Prepare the whole panel to be faded onto up to the panel edge or to a break line.

2. Fade the normally thinned basecoat to approx. 30% across the fade out panel at reduced spraygun pressure.

3. Mix some of the remaining thinned basecoat in the gun pot, 1 part basecoat to 3 parts T490 Clear Adjuster. Using the resulting basecoat mix, fade the basecoat further to approx. 60% across the fade out panel, again at reduced spraygun pressure.

4. Pour out the reduced basecoat from the previous step from the gun pot, leaving a small

amount of colour on the sides of the pot. Then add enough T490 for the application of 1 full coat to the fade out panel. Stir the mix to incorporate the small amount of basecoat colour to give the T490 Clear Adjuster a slight tint.

5. Apply 1 full coat of the tinted Clear Adjuster layer over the whole of fade out panel, up to the edge where the Matt Clearcoat will be applied. This coat is applied at normal basecoat pressure. This step will provide an even surface to apply the Matt Clearcoat over. Omitting this step will leave a basecoat edge which could result in uneven gloss levels across the panel.

6. Allow the basecoat to fully flash off as normal before applying the Matt Clearcoat.

7. Using the Matt Clearcoat mix established from the test panels to give to best gloss level match to the area of the vehicle being repaired, apply the Matt Clearcoat following the application recommendation given earlier.

Fade Out Panel

⇦⇦ Step 2 ⇨⇨¦ ¦

⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦ Step 3 ⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨ ¦

⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦ Step 5 ⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨

⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦⇦ Step 7 ⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨⇨


Page 7 of 8

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS The Gloss levels achieved with this clear may vary depending upon film thickness and application. Low film thickness and dry application will give a Low Gloss. High film thickness and wet application will give a higher gloss level. To remove minor dirt inclusions in the final finish, the repair should be fully dried, de-nibbed after cooling and one further coat of the Clearcoat Mix applied. Care should be taken to avoid too high clearcoat film thicknesses because the final colour could be affected. In this situation, the repair will require sanding and recoating with Basecoat and Clearcoat. Dirt removal from the final Matt Finish is not possible.

GENERAL CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF MATT FINISHES

The following guidance on Care and Cleaning of matt finish vehicles is aimed at the car owner, and applies to both the OE and the repair finish. Particular care must be taken with Matt Finishes to maintain an original even Matt effect.

Guidance for the car owner on maintaining the even matt effect over time

1. In order to keep the Matt surface effect, the use of paint cleaner, abrasives or polishes and wax polishes must be avoided. The vehicle must not be polished.

2. Polishing will lead to a higher, uneven gloss effect.

3. Cleaning/Polishing with unsuitable materials could alter the Matt effect (generally

increased gloss).

4. Automated car washing machines should be avoided. The preferred car washing method is by hand with a soft sponge, neutral soap and lots of water. Too frequent car washing could over a period of time lead to increased and inconsistent gloss levels across a car panel. Washing under direct sunlight should be avoided.

5. Insects and bird residues should be removed immediately. The residues should be soaked in water to soften and/or removed carefully with a high pressure cleaning equipment. In the case of strongly adhered residues, a spray on insect remover should be used prior to washing.

6. Whenever using any type of cleaning fluids with soft sponges or cloths, it is essential not to apply pressure or rub the Matt finish. A gentle wipe/spray on, wipe off technique should be used. Applying pressure will alter the Matt effect and result in an uneven appearance.

EQUIPMENT CLEANING

After use, clean all equipment thoroughly with cleaning solvent or thinner.


Page 8 of 8








June 2006

Product Information GRS Deltron D880

PRODUCTS Deltron Clear D880 Deltron Medium Solids Hardeners D803, D841, D861, D864 Deltron Thinners D808, D807, D812, D869 Deltron DG Fade-out Thinner D868 Deltron Accelerator D818 For matt, satin and textured finishes or painting of flexible substrates: Deltron Matting Base D759 to create a matt or satin appearance Deltron Plasticiser D814 to plasticise finishes over a flexible substrate Deltron Matt Flexibiliser D819 to create a matt or satin appearance over a flexible substrate Deltron Texture Additive D843 to create a fine textured ‘suede’ effect Deltron Leather Grain Additive D844 to create a coarser, more pronounced textured finish PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Deltron D880 High Solids Clear is a premium quality high solids polyurethane clearcoat specifically formulated to give optimum gloss and durability when low-baked.

It is designed to be used over Deltron BC and Envirobase Colour. PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE Deltron D880 Clear must be applied on top of a clean and dust-free Deltron basecoat or Envirobase. The use of a tack rag is recommended.

High-solids Clear


MIXING RATIOS Mixing Ratio with MS Hardener: By Volume D880 2 vol MS Hardener* 1 vol Thinner 0.5 vol

• Choose MS Hardener and Thinner according to application temperature

HARDENER AND THINER SELECTION

Temperature MS Hardener Thinner Up to 18°C D803 Fast D808 18°C - 25°C D841 Medium D807 Over 25°C D861 Slow D812

For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35ºC / >70%) the use of Very Slow Thinner D869 is recommended.


Potlife at 20°C: 3 hours Spray viscosity at 20°C: 17 seconds DIN4



Number of coats: 1 medium , 1 full

Flash-off at 20°C:

- Between coats 10 - 15 minutes

- Before stoving 15 minutes


DRYING TIMES

Drying times*:

- Dust free at 20 °C 40 minutes

- Dry to handle at 20°C 6 hours

- Through dry at 20 °C 20 hours




Dependent on colour of basecoat (darker colours require less time):

15 minutes


Drying times may be reduced still further by using the Deltron Accelerated System.


Theoretical coverage: Assuming 100% transfer efficiency and dry film thickness as indicated:

7 - 7.5 m²/l



- Grade wet P800

- Grade dry P400



after cooling

- Airdrying at 20°C Minimum 12 hours

Overcoat with: Deltron primers, Envirobase, Deltron topcoats



Mixing by volume

With MS Hardener - 2:1:0.5 Pot Life at 20°C 3 hours Hardener / Thinner Selection





Application viscosity 17 seconds DIN4 Spraygun Size 1.4 - 1.8 mm fluid tip Number of Coats 1 medium coat followed by 1 full coat Drying Times Dust Free - 40 minutes Through dry at 20°C - 20 hours Through dry at 60°C - 30 minutes


MATT, SATIN AND TEXTURED FINISHES / PAINTING OF FLEXIBLE SUBSTRATES

To obtain a matt, semi-matt (satin) or textured finish with Deltron D880 HS Clear, it is necessary to include suitable matt, flex or texture additives in the mix. Additives are also required when applying D880 over a flexible substrate (typically plastics). The additives required and the appropriate volume and weight mix ratios are indicated in microfiches if relevant or in the tables below.

Note : RIGID substrates include all metals, fibreglass & GRP FLEXIBLE substrates are all plastic types except GRP Substrate Appearance D880 D759 D843 D844 D814 D819 MS

hardener Deltron Thinner

RIGID Gloss 2 vol - - - - - 1 vol 0.5 vol Satin 2 vol 2,5vol - - - - 1,5 vol 1 vol Matt 2 vol 3,5 vol - - - - 2 vol 1,5 vol FLEXIBLE Gloss 3 vol - - - 1 vol 2 vol 1 vol Satin 2 vol 1.5vol - - - 1 vol 2 vol 1.5 vol Matt 2 vol 3 vol - - - 1 vol 2 vol 0.5 vol


- Apply Deltron D880 HS Clear according to the 'Application, Flash-Off and Drying' section above. - Leave to flash-off for 10 minutes / 20°C after the 2nd coat.

- A suitable quantity of activated and thinned D880 HS Clear should then be reduced with Deltron DG Fade-Out Thinner D868 at a ratio of 1:3 (1 part activated and thinned clear to 3 parts D868).

- Apply this 1:3 mix over the repair area, using a reduced gun pressure to minimise overspray. Spray from the outside of the repair inwards, covering an area that extends beyond the edge of the initial application.

- After force-dry or IR, buff the repair edges. POLISHING

Low-bake or IR force-drying: Minimum 1 hour after cooling

Airdrying at 20°C: Minimum 24 hours after application



October 2006 TDS: RLD51

Product Information

DELFLEET 350 – F341

PRODUCT

Delfleet 350 Topcoat Binder F341

Delfleet MS Hardener F361

Delfleet MS Fast Hardener F362


Delfleet Medium Thinner F372

Delfleet Fast Thinner F373

Delfleet Accelerator F381

PRODUCT DRSCRIPTION Delfleet 350 is a high performance 2-pack topcoat system specifically designed for the commercial vehicle market.

Delfleet 350 technology combines appearance and durability with easy application on large areas.

The Delfleet system of hardeners and thinners mean that the spraying characterisitics can be varied to suit

different application methods , conditions and types of job.


Prepare the substrate as follows: Original finishes and work in sound condition need to be degreased , cleaned and dry sanded with P320-P360 ( P600 wet ) prior to topcoat application. Steel , Aluminum , GRP & Zinc coated steel need to be pre-primed with the appropriate Delfleet primer in order to ensure correct intercoat adhesion and substrate protection.

CLEANING

The substrate to be painted must be dry,clean,free of corrosion,grease & mould release agents. Substrates need to be thoroughly prepared using a combination of D845 Degreaser & D837 Spirit Wipe ( or D842 low V.O.C.cleaner )

Do not use F350 over -: Acrylic Thermoplastic Finishes Synthetic finishes unless completely dry Waterbased primers unless completely dry.



HVLP / Pressure By volume

F341 2 F36* 1

F37* 0.5


F341 2 F36* 1

F37* 0-5

Potlife at 20°C -: 8 Hours

< 18°C -:

F362 / F372 / F373

18-25°C -: F361 / F372 / F371

> 25°C -: F361 / F371

Viscosity:

HVLP

15 - 17 sec.

DIN4/20ºC

PRESSURE

15 - 17 sec.

DIN4/20ºC

AIRLESS / AIRMIX

17 – 25 sec. DIN4/20°C

Gun set-up:

1.4-1.8 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

0.85 -1.1 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

Fluid 280-320

cc/min

9-11 thou

( 0.22-0.28mm)

Airless-: 1750-2250 psi

Airmix-: 1000-1500psi

20-25 psi Air Cap

Number of coats: 2 2 1-2

20ºC Flash off:

Between coats

Before bake

10 - 15 mins.

15 - 20 mins.

10 – 15 mins.

15 - 20 mins.

15- 20 mins.

30 mins.

Drying time:

20°C Dust free: 20°C Through dry 60ºC Bake (metal temp.) IR Medium Wave

HVLP 10-20 mins. 24 Hours 40 mins. 10-15 mins.

PRESSURE 10-20 mins. 24 Hours 40 mins. 10-15 mins.

AIRLESS / AIRMIX 20-30 mins. 24 hours 45-60 mins.. N/A

Dry film

thickness:


40µm

60µm

8-9.5m2/ll

40µm

60µm

8-9.5m2/l

50µm

70µm

9-10m2/l




For lower temperatures or improved cure / reduced tape-up times , the addition of F381 Delfleet Accelerator in

additions of 2-4% by weight to the rfu mixture will reduce drying times significantly. Alternatively the addition can

be made directly to the colour prior to activation in the proportion of 3-6% by weight. The addition will affect the

potlife.


HEALTH AND SAFETY



These products are for professional use only. RLD54V Page 1


Product Information

DELFLEET F393

PRODUCT

Delfleet Chromate-Free Wash Primer F393

Delfleet Reactive Reducer F365


Delfleet Thinner F372

Delfleet Fast Thinner F373

PRODUCT DRSCRIPTION Delfleet Chromate-Free Wash Primer is a medium build wash etch which complies with current European VOC legislation. It is designed to give good adhesion when used on new panels and to promote the adhesion of subsequent paint films. It is equally suitable for use on small and large surfaces and may be used in a Wet-on-Wet system if required. This product must always be catalysed with its own Reactive Reducer , F365 , before use.


Prepare the substrate as follows: New hot / cold rolled steel / old steel Old steel

SAND Shot Blast P180-240 Dry

CLEANING

The substrate to be painted must be dry,clean,free of corrosion,grease & mould release agents. Substrates need to be thoroughly prepared using a combination of D845 Degreaser & D837 Spirit Wipe ( or D842 low V.O.C.cleaner )

Zintec Galvanised Steel Sound paint finishes GRP

P180-240 Dry P240-320 Dry P180-240 Dry P320-P400 Dry

Aluminium

SAND P280-320 Dry



Choose thinner according to application temperature and vehicle size.

Delfleet F393 2 Vol. Delfleet F365 1 Vol. Thinner* 0,5 Vol.

Allow product to stand 20 minutes prior to use

Potlife at 20°C -: 24Hours

Up to 18°C -: F373

18°C-25°C-: F372

> 25°C -: F371

Viscosity:

HVLP


PRESSURE


Gun set-up:

1.4-1.8 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

0.85.-1.1 mm.

2 Bar Inlet

Fluid 350-420 cc/min

Number of coats: 2 2

20ºC Flash off: Between coats Before Recoat

10 mins.

Min. 15 mins.

Max. – 6 hours.

10 mins.

Min.-15 mins

Max. – 6 hours

Drying time:

20°C Dust free:

20°C Through dry

HVLP

5-10 mins.

1 Hour

PRESSURE

5-10 mins.

1 Hour

Dry film

thickness:

Minimum

Maximum


15 µm

25µm

6-7m2/l

15 µm

25µm

6-7m2/l

Theoretical coverage in m2 per litre r.f.u. giving 20µm dry film thickness.

Wet: If necessary P600-P800 or Dry: P320-P 400

Recoat time at 20°C: Minimum 20 minutes Maximum 6 hours Overcoat with: Any Delfleet Primer or Topcoat.



This product is designed for use as an adhesion promoter ; Do not use as an isolator.

Maximum dry film build should be 25µm.


The EU limit for this product (product category:IIB.c) in ready for use form is max. 780g/l of VOC.



HEALTH AND SAFETY




October 2006 - Updated 20th Mar.’09 TDS: RLD55

Product Information

DELFLEET F392 / F3976

PRODUCT Delfleet High Build Primer Surfacer White F3976 Delfleet High Build Primer Surfacer Grey F392 Delfleet VOC MS Hardener F357 Delfleet MS Hardener F361 Delfleet Slow Thinner F371 Delfleet Thinner F372

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Delfleet 2K Primer F392 is a versatile fleet primer which can be used as a low VOC high build primer, or as a primer-surfacer or non-sand primer, simply by varying the amount of thinner used.

It is particularly recommended for use on large surfaces such as those found on trucks, buses and trains where its excellent flow helps reduce time spent on sanding. For high specification corrosion resistance, it is recommended that this primer should be used over Etch Primer F397 or Wash primer F379.


Substrate New hot rolled steel New cold rolled steel Old steel Zinc Galvanised steel Aluminium and alloys GRP Agend painted surfaces

Sand Shot blast P80-120 P80-120 P80-120 P320 (dry)

Pre-prime F393,F397 or F391 Not necessary

Degrease

No All surfaces should be thoroughly degreased using the appropriate PPG substrate cleaner (see guide overleaf)

Do not use Delfleet 2K primer over:

- Acrylic TP finishes - Synthetic finishes


PREPARATION AND APPLICATION GUIDE TO SELECTION OF SUBSTRATE CLEANER Code Product Purpose

D845 DX310 High Strength Degreaser

For use as a pre-cleaner in the first stage of the process. Use before starting any repair work and on any bare metal substrate

D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe Suitable for removing dirt, grease or other contaminants before or during the painting process

D842 DX380 Low VOC Cleaner

Particularly designed to remove contaminants after sanding, and in areas where VOC emissions should be minimised

F392 / F3976 F357 F372*

Primer Surfacer 4 vol 1 vol 1 vol

Non-sand Primer 4 vol 1 vol 2 vol

Pressure Pot 4 vol 1 vol

1-2 vol

*Thinner selection:

Temperature Thinner Up to 18°C F372 Thinner Over 18°C F371 Thinner

Potlife at 20°C 2 hr 30 min

3 hr 30 min

2 hr 30 min / 3 hr 30 min

Spray Viscosity

DIN4/20°C: 22-24 secs 16-18 SECS 16-24 SECS

Spray Gun set-up:

Spray Pressure:

1.6-1.8 mm

4 bar

1.4-1.6 mm

4 bar

1.4 mm

4 – 5 bar

Numer of coats: 2 - 3 1 - 2 2 full

20ºC Flash off:

Between coat

Before stoving

15 min

15 min

15 min

No stoving

15 min

10 – 15 min

Drying time:

20°C 60°C 70ºC IR medium

3 hours 40 min* 30 min* 20 min

20 – 30 min flash-off before topcoat



Total dry film buld:

Minimum Maximum


70µ 100µ 4 m² / l(100µ)

30µ 60µ 8 m² / l(50µ)

70µ 90µ 6 m² / l(75µ)


** Theoretical coverage in m² per liter ready to spray mixture, giving indicated dry film thickness.

Sanding:

Flatting: Wet Dry

Yes P400 - P600 P320 - P360

No Yes P400 P600

P320 - P360 Overcoat/re-coat time: Non-sand at 20°C Pre-sand At 20°C At 60°C

40 min 3 hours 30 min

20 – 30 min 20 min


1. 2. Overcoat with:

Any Delfleet topcoat. See Hardener selection for topcoat, as recommended in product description.

GREYMATICS These primers may be blended as below to give a range of GreyMatics. G01 G03 G05 G06 G07 F392 - Grey - 100g 99.5g 97.5g 88.5g F3976 - White 100g - - - - F3561 - Black Paste - - 0.5g 2.5g 11.5g

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS The use of F361 MS Hardener is only recommended in 4:1 mixing ratio. Depending on the added thinner you may use it as High Build Primer or Primer Surfacer.

To provide a coloured undercoat, Delfleet 2K Primer F392 may be tinted with up to 5% of an appropriate Delfleet tinter before mixing with hardener and thinner.

The use of HVLP spray equipment can give an increase in transfer efficiency of about 10% depending upon the brand and model of equipment used.

As the 2K components are sensitive to humidity all equipment must be perfectly dry. We do not advise using this product when relative humidity exceeds 80%.

Part used cans of hardener must be carefully closed.

After use clean spray gun thoroughly with F371 or F372 thinner.



HEALTH AND SAFETY




October 2006 - Updated 24th May 2011 TDS: RLD55

Product Information

DELFLEET F392 / F3976

PRODUCT Delfleet High Build Primer Surfacer White F3976 Delfleet High Build Primer Surfacer Grey F392 Delfleet VOC MS Hardener F357 Delfleet MS Hardener F361 Delfleet Slow Thinner F371 Delfleet Thinner F372

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Delfleet 2K Primer F392 is a versatile fleet primer which can be used as a low VOC high build primer, or as a primer-surfacer or non-sand primer, simply by varying the amount of thinner used.

It is particularly recommended for use on large surfaces such as those found on trucks, buses and trains where its excellent flow helps reduce time spent on sanding. For high specification corrosion resistance, it is recommended that this primer should be used over Etch Primer F397 or Wash primer F379.


Substrate New hot rolled steel New cold rolled steel Old steel Zinc Galvanised steel Aluminium and alloys GRP Aged painted surfaces

Sand Shot blast P80-120 P80-120 P80-120 P320 (dry)

Pre-prime F393,F397 or F391 Not necessary

Degrease

No All surfaces should be thoroughly degreased using the appropriate PPG substrate cleaner (see guide overleaf)

Do not use Delfleet 2K primer over:

- Acrylic TP finishes - Synthetic finishes


PREPARATION AND APPLICATION GUIDE TO SELECTION OF SUBSTRATE CLEANER Code Product Purpose

D845 DX310 High Strength Degreaser

For use as a pre-cleaner in the first stage of the process. Use before starting any repair work and on any bare metal substrate

D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe Suitable for removing dirt, grease or other contaminants before or during the painting process

D842 DX380 Low VOC Cleaner

Particularly designed to remove contaminants after sanding, and in areas where VOC emissions should be minimised

F392 / F3976 F357 F372*

Primer Surfacer 4 vol 1 vol 1 vol

Non-sand Primer 4 vol 1 vol 2 vol

Pressure Pot 4 vol 1 vol

1-2 vol

*Thinner selection:

Temperature Thinner Up to 18°C F372 Thinner Over 18°C F371 Thinner

Potlife at 20°C 2 hr 30 min

3 hr 30 min

2 hr 30 min / 3 hr 30 min

Spray Viscosity

DIN4/20°C: 22-24 secs 16-18 SECS 16-24 SECS

Spray Gun set-up:

Spray Pressure:

1.6-1.8 mm

4 bar

1.4-1.6 mm

4 bar

1.4 mm

4 – 5 bar

Number of coats: 2 - 3 1 - 2 2 full

20ºC Flash off:

Between coat

Before stoving

15 min

15 min

15 min

No stoving

15 min

10 – 15 min

Drying time:

20°C 60°C 70ºC IR medium


20 – 30 min flash-off before topcoat



Total dry film buld:

Minimum Maximum


70µ 100µ 4 m² / l(100µ)

30µ 60µ 8 m² / l(50µ)

70µ 90µ 6 m² / l(75µ)


** Theoretical coverage in m² per litre ready to spray mixture, giving indicated dry film thickness.

Sanding:

Flatting: Wet Dry

Yes P400 - P600 P320 - P360

No Yes P400 P600

P320 - P360 Overcoat/re-coat time: Non-sand at 20°C Pre-sand At 20°C At 60°C


20 – 30 min 20 min


1. 2. Overcoat with:

Any Delfleet topcoat. See Hardener selection for topcoat, as recommended in product description.

GREYMATICS These primers may be blended as below to give a range of GreyMatics. G01 G03 G05 G06 G07 F392 - Grey - 100g 99.5g 97.5g 88.5g F3976 - White 100g - - - - F3561 - Black Paste - - 0.5g 2.5g 11.5g

PAINTING PLASTICS F392 / F3976 can be used over the appropriate plastics primer, when painting plastic parts, to give build. When used over very flexible plastics these primers should be mixed:- 7 parts F392 / F3976 2 parts F3437 Flexible Additive 1.5 parts Hardener 2.5 parts Thinner Note: The use of the flexible Additive will extend drying times

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS The use of F361 MS Hardener is only recommended in 4:1 mixing ratio. Depending on the added thinner you may use it as High Build Primer or Primer Surfacer.

To provide a coloured undercoat, Delfleet 2K Primer F392 may be tinted with up to 5% of an appropriate Delfleet tinter before mixing with hardener and thinner.

The use of HVLP spray equipment can give an increase in transfer efficiency of about 10% depending upon the brand and model of equipment used.

As the 2K components are sensitive to humidity all equipment must be perfectly dry. We do not advise using this product when relative humidity exceeds 80%.

Part used cans of hardener must be carefully closed.

After use clean spray gun thoroughly with F371 or F372 thinner.



HEALTH AND SAFETY




D837 - DX330 Spirit Wipe D845 - DX310 High Strength Degreaser D8401 - Waterborne Low VOC Cleaner

GLOBAL REFINISH

SYSTEM

August 2008

Product Information DELTRON CLEANERS PRODUCT DESCRIPTION D837 – DX330 Spirit Wipe is a mild blend of solvents suitable for use as an ‘in process’ cleaner, suitable for cleaning fresh primers after sanding.

D845 – DX310 High Strength Degreaser is a strong blend of solvents, specifically designed to remove dirt, grease and other contaminants prior to preparation. This cleaner should only be used as a pre-cleaner.

D8401 – Waterborne Low VOC Cleaner is a waterborne ‘spirit wipe’ suitable for use as an ‘in process’ cleaner.

APPLICATION Apply generous quantities of Deltron Cleaner to a clean cloth.

Wipe surfaces to be cleaned before and after sanding.

Wipe surfaces in once direction only, to prevent smearing of contaminants.

After using, wipe off surplus cleaner with a clean dry cloth. Do not allow the product to dry on the surface which has been cleaned.


March 2007 TDS: RLD70V

Product Information

DELFLEET F382 – F383

PRODUCT Delfleet Grain Additive F382 Delfleet PU Matt Colour Delfleet Texture Additive F383 Delfleet QD Colour Delfleet 350 Colour Delfleet Thinner F372 Delfleet 280 Colour

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Delfleet Grain and Texture Additives are designed to respond to the need for products to cover slight substrate defects and in addition they give anti-chip, anti-slip properties. They should be used only with a conventional spray system. Delfleet Grain Additive is specifically intended for use on plastics and for the interior of vans.


Please refer to the relevant topcoat data sheet for preparation details.


CONVENTIONAL 1. Mix the chosen topcoat with the appropriate hardener

(see topcoat data sheet for details).

2. Use activated mixture as follows: GRAIN ADDITIVE F382

280 / 350 5 vols F382 1 vol or: PU Matt / QD: 4 vols F382 1 vol

TEXTURE ADDITIVE F383 topcoat: 3 vols F383 1 vol

Potlife at 20°C -:

See relevant topcoat data sheet


GRAIN ADDITIVE

F382

TEXTURE ADDITIVE

F383

Thinning Ratio

CONVENTIONAL Mixed Colour / Additive: No thinning required

CONVENTIONAL Step 1 Mixed Colour / Additive 3 vols F372 1 vol

CONVENTIONAL

Step 2 Mixed Colour / Additive: No thinning required

Gun set-up: Spray pressure :

1.7 - 1.9 mm 3.5 - 4.5 bar

1.5 - 1.7 mm

2.5 mm 1 - 1.5 bar

Number of coats: 1 fast, 2 normal 2 normal 2 – 3

20ºC Flash off:

30 minutes

30 minutes

30 minutes


The final appearance of the finish can be adjusted as required according to the pressure used and the number of coats applied.


HEALTH AND SAFETY





Product Information

DELFLEET F381

PRODUCT Delfleet 2K Accelerator F381 Delfleet 2K products

PRODUCT DRSCRIPTION Delfleet 2K Accelerator is an additive used to assist the drying of polyurethane / isocyanate systems only, when the temperature is below 15°C.

SUBSTRATE PRE-TREATMENT Please refer to the relevant product data sheet for preparation details

APPLICATION GUIDE Delfleet Accelerator F381 may be added to the colour prior to the addition of hardener in the proportion of 3 - 6% by weight (40 - 80cc or 35 - 70 gm per litre). Alternatively F381 may be added at the colour ready-to-spray stage in the proportion of 2 - 4% by weight (26 - 52cc or 23 - 46 gm per litre).

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS The addition of accelerator reduces the potlife and should usually be used for small surfaces only . An excess of accelerator can reduce the flow and the gloss.


HEALTH AND SAFETY





May 2006

Product Information D854 TRANSPARENT SEALER

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION D854 Transparent Sealer is ideal for the rapid repainting of sound original substrates.

D854 promotes excellent gloss holdout of 2K topcoats over a range of sanded substrates. These include OE finishes, any sound aged paint surface, and non-synthetic primer-surfacers.

For the repainting of OE or other sound paintwork, D854 sealer will also perform as a simple adhesion promoter, eliminating the requirement to sand the substrate.

D854 is especially recommended when a wet-on wet paint system is required to save labour costs during the sanding process, and since it is transparent it is especially suited to respray work, avoiding the need for long and delicate masking around door-shuts, panel edges etc.


In all cases, select the appropriate PPG cleaner(s). See Technical Data Sheet: Deltron Cleaners RLD63. Ensure that the substrate is thoroughly cleaned and dried both before and after preparation work. When using sealer as a wet-on wet sealer OE or existing paintwork should be sanded back to sound substrate layers using P320-360 grit discs (dry) or P600-800 grade paper (wet). Any exposed bare metal should be spot primed with D831 Universel Chromate-free Wash Primer. Primed surfaces should be sanded with P320 grit discs (dry) or P600 grade paper (wet). When using sealer as an adhesion promoter Sound OE or existing paintwork should simply be cleaned thoroughly. Areas particularly susceptible to stone chip damage - leading edges, wheel arches or sills, for example, will benefit from additional adhesion if abraded with a scotchbrite pad.


MIXING RATIOS

1. Mixing Ratios with MS Hardener – Wet on Wet Sealer:

Wet-On-Wet Sealer D854 3 vol MS Hardener 1 vol Thinner 1 vol

2. Mixing Ratios with MS Hardener – Adhesion Promoter:

Adhesion Promoter

D854 3 vol MS Hardener 1 vol Thinner 2 vol

3. Mixing Ratios with HS Hardener –:

With HS Hardener D854 5 vol HS Hardener 1 vol Thinner 2 vol

MIXED PRODUCT DETAILS Wet on Wet Adhesion Promoter With HS Hardener Potlife at 20ºC 2-3 hours 3-4 hours 3-4 hours Spray Viscosity 18-20 seconds 16 - 18 seconds 20 - 24 seconds DIN4 20ºC

HARDENER AND THINNER SELECTION When overcoating D854 sealer wet-on-wet with, GRS Deltron DG, GRS Deltron UHS or GRS Deltron BC and Clearcoat, it is important to use the same speed hardener or slower in the topcoat as used for the application of D854 Sealer. Temperature MS Hardener HS Hardener Thinner Up to 18ºC D803 Fast D8208 D808 Fast Thinner 18ºC - 25ºC D841 Medium D897 D866 or D807 Thinner Over 25ºC D861 Slow D897 D812 Slow Thinner


APPLICATION AND FLASH OFF Wet-On-Wet Adhesion Promoter With HS Hardener

Spraygun set-up:

1.3 -1.4mm 1.3 -1.4mm 1.4 -1.6mm

Spray pressure:

See spraygun manufacturers

information


information


information Number of coats:

2 normal 1 normal 2 normal

Flash-off at 20°C:

Between coats

5-10 minutes - 5-10 minutes

Before topcoat

20 - 30 minutes

15-20 minutes

20-30 minutes

DRYING TIMES

Drying times:

When used as a sealer which has to be sanded to obtain optimum finish

Dust free at 20°C

10 minutes

Through dry at 20°C

Overnight

Through dry at 60°C

30 - 45 minutes

Through dry IR medium

5 minutes

Total dry

film build:

Minimum 25 µm 10 µm 25µm

Maximum 50 µm 20 µm 50 µm

REPAIR AND RECOATING Overcoat/recoat time:Overcoat without sanding within 12 hours of application. In order to ensure good adhesion if over 12 hours, or in order to remove dirt or defects, Sealer may be sanded after it after it has through dried.

Sanding: In normal use it is not necessary to sand this product

Use P400 grade (dry) or P600-800 (wet) if required Overcoat with: Any PPG 2K topcoat.

See ‘Hardener’ section for topcoats as recommended in ‘Product Description’.


PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS Do not use 1K, synthetic, cellulose topcoat over Sealer.

If required, D854 may be coloured with up to 10% by volume of Deltron DG Tinter or up to 5-10% of Deltron UHS tinter in VOC compliant version. Select only Deltron DG or UHS Tinter, and do not exceed this mix ratio. Additional thinner may be required in order to achieve correct application viscosity.

Deltron Accelerator D818, or D864 Accelerated Hardener, should not be used in D854.

After use, clean spray equipment thoroughly with cleaning solvent or thinner.


HEALTH AND SAFETY





Product Information

DELFLEET F385

PRODUCT

Delfleet Matting Agent for 1K Topcoat F385

Delfleet QD or other Delfleet 1K Topcoat

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Delfleet Matting Agent for 1K Topcoat F385 is specially designed to reduce the gloss in all one-pack topcoats such as Delfleet QD. The standard matt finish is easy to achieve.


Mixing Ratio:

SEMI-MATT (30% GLOSS) Delfleet QD* 4 vols F385 1 vol Thinner F372 1 vol

* Other 1K Delfleet topcoats may be used in the same proportions to achieve a 30% gloss finish. By progressively reducing the quantity of F385, gloss level is increased.

Stirring:

Immediately after preparing, the mixed paint must be stirred or shaken. For volume greater than 3 litres, stirring is not effective enough, use shaker.


Spray Viscosity at 20°C: Gun set-up:

16 - 18 secs DIN4 1.4 - 1.6 mm

Spray pressure: Number of coats:

3.5 - 4.5 bar 2 - 3 coats

20ºC Flash off: Between coats

10 - 15 minutes

Drying time:

Please refer to re levant topcoat Data Sheet

PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS Delfleet Matting Agent for 1K Topcoat F385 can also be used in 2K Clear F390. Mixing ratio: 1 vol Clear + 1 vol F385 + 0.5 vol Hardener F361 + 0.5 vol Thinner F372 Its use in 2K Clear requires more application skill, however, and a pre-spray test is recommended. Durability of topcoats will be reduced by the use of matting agents.


HEALTH AND SAFETY



Technical Data Sheet T001V. SPP Polishing System. Page 1

SPP POLISHING SYSTEM TDS_T001_May 2006 Product Description SP1000 – Starter Kit. This comprises of SP1001 Dry-Use Polishing Compound, SPN1901 Backing Plate, SPN1902 Compounding Foam Pad, SPN1903 Final Polishing Pad and SPN 1904 Finishing cloth. SP1001 Dry-Use Polishing Compound, has been specially formulated to remove sand scratches, dirt inclusions and swirl marks from refinish paint films. SPN1901 Backing Plate – for use with the compounding and polishing pads. SPN1902 Compounding Foam Pad. A specifically manufactured foam pad to give ease of compounding. SPN1903 Final Polishing Pad. A special pad manufactured from very soft foam to remove swirl marks and give high lustre finishes. SPN1904 Finishing Cloth. For removal of traces of polish from the surface of panels. SPN1905 Lambswool Compounding Pad for polishing extremely hard paint and difficult paint films.

Technical Data Sheet T001V. SPP Polishing System. Page 2

PREPARATION OF POLISHING PADS

Conditioning of pads before first use is required This is done by: • Add 5ml of polish onto the pad • At low speed, work polish into pad • Repeat this process until pad is saturated

APPLICATION

When to polish After the “Into Service” times recommended in the appropriate technical datasheet. Allow the vehicle to cool and the new paint film to through harden. For example, allow 2K to air-dry approximately 16 hours. After a full bake cycle, allow approximately 1 hour after removal from oven to cool fully. Polishing is generally easier if completed up to 48 hours from the “Into Service time”.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

These products are for professional use only, and are not to be used for purposes other than those specified. The information on this TDS is based on present scientific and technical knowledge, and it is the responsibility of the user to take all necessary steps in order to ensure the suitability of the product for the intended purpose. For Health and Safety information or a Material Safety Data Sheet, please contact customer services at the address below.

For further information please contact: Customer Service and Sales Group PPG Industries (UK) Ltd Needham Road Stowmarket Suffolk, IP14 2AD Tel: 01449 771771 Fax: 01449 773472

Mercedes-Benz Approved Paint Repair Systems Index · S-01-GBL: A- and B-Class, flattable Surfacer,...

Documents

Transcript of Mercedes-Benz Approved Paint Repair Systems Index · S-01-GBL: A- and B-Class, flattable Surfacer,...